» <^'MSL 'T «c<%> V.;££T. CCCC £ CM i re 50 < < c c c - c c c c cere • <7 i C£JC CCJi ,YV < c ^ Library of Congress. UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. .c H .P.._iF.illi c^-^s^O: CfCC ^C^eocrc ■< CC CC 01 cc cc ^ ^1C. cc CTc AHN'S METHOD ^ OF LEARNING THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. REVISED BY GUSTAVUS FISCHER. FIRST (PRACTICAL) COURSE. NEW YORK: E. 8 t e i g e r, 18U. ,AVr Entered} according to Act of Congress> In the year 1871, by E. Steiger, in the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. E. Steiger, New York, Printer and Electrotyper. PREFACE. Ahn's Method of Learning the German Language con- sists of a Practical and a Theoretical Course. The former contains progressive exercises in both languages, beginning with the simplest elementary forms, and in the natural pro- gress of the course gradually expanding with the different forms of inflection and the most important parts of Syntax, till the student may be considered sufficiently familiar with the lan- guage to begin reading German text. The different exercises are preceded by special vocabularies and as many rules as the student would need to render the exercises without mistakes. The First Part of the Practical Course is preliminary, being intended to give the beginner a general idea of German forms and constructions. The Second Part reviews the preliminary exercises in a more complete and systematic manner; and the Third Part chiefly contains exercises on tenses, moods, re- flexive and compound verbs, conjunctions, prepositions and syntactical idioms, A general vocabulary, appended to the Course, facilitates the rendering of words that have already occurred in previous exercises without being repeated in the special vocabularies. For the gradual acquirement of German handwriting a spe- cial, and — we hope — efficient provision has been made at the close of the Course, designed to accompany the single ex- ercises, but so that the beginner may or may not make use of it, the Course itself being in neither case interfered with. Pronunciation has been treated in a preliminary chapter. The Theoretical Course contains a brief and systematic abstract of grammatical rules, to be studied either separately, or in connection with the Practical Course. Paradigms have been given no more than necessity required, but those given are complete. Either Course will occupy no more than one in — IV — College-Term. In schools a longer time should be devoted to the study of each Course. The Editor has in the First and Second parts of the Prac- tical Course mainly reproduced Aim's work as it was originally written by him, but the numerous errors and practical incon- gruities and inconveniences have been carefully corrected. Many sentences in the exercises have been rejected, and others have been introduced whenever it seemed necessary. Many new rules have been added, since in the original work no account was taken of the method of instruction peculiar to our country. The Third Part of the Practical Course, the weakest in Ahn's original Method, has been entirely re-written in such a way as Ahn probably would have adopted, had he written for this country and at this day. The stock of words used, has been greatly enlarged, since the small number of words in Ahn's Method by which he builds up and rebuilds all his sentences, are always leading to great practical inconveniences, however desirable it may be to confine first beginners to as few words as possible. With the same view, the whole Theoretical Course, which in no wise comes up to the requirement of this country and of this time, has been entirely written anew, and only the general division of the work into chapters has been retained. In this Theoretical Course the grammatical material has been selected in accordance with the principle-that the student should master the leading facts of the language in the directest and plainest way possible, in order to arrive by the shortest road at the reading of text. Due regard has been always paid to ' con- versational language' in the Practical Course, while in the Theoretical Course the preparation of the student for ' reading' has been the main object. We deemed it necessary to add a complete index referring to both Courses, not doubting that this addition will meet the approval of all that shall use the work. An absolute or even relative i completeness' cannot be ex- pected in a work of this kind. Indeed, no grammar extant can be considered ' complete.' Xo grammarian can do more than select l something' out of the inexhaustible store of the __ y — living language, discover the secret and silent laws which have produced the forms of this i something, ' and call a collection of such laves * a grammar.' Hov>* many details should be thus presented, depends on the tact of the grammarian; But to the 'end of language' no grammarian has yet come, and in this sense all grammars are (more or less) incomplete. Whether we have been successful in our selections, whether or not we have omitted many things that ought to have been explained, and explained many things that ought to have been omitted, the reader must decide. Indeed, in this method of 'selection' consists almost the whole art of a grammarian. In the present work many rules will be found which will be in vain looked for in other grammars, and many will not be found which other grammarians are in the habit of presenting. Whatever may be thought of such deviations from the accus- tomed ruts (often regarded as almost sacred with a peculiar superstition), we always had our reasons for either the omission or the addition, which reasons, although they have nowhere been presented, the attentive reader will without difficulty discover 'between the lines'.. But we hope that no essential law of the language will be missed, and that both the teacher and the student will iind explicitness in our different statements to be commensurate with the lesser or greater difficulty of the subject, A. glance at any of the different chapters, for instance those on adjectives, prepositions, con- junctions and the subjunctive mood, will fully bear out these remarks. The terminology adopted is the one which is uni- versally used in Germany. Xobody will now find fault with such expressions as 'strong and weak verbs or nouns'. All recent German grammarians and lexicographers i^we believe without a solitary exception) have adopted these terras*, and * The expressions strong and weak in reference to declension and con- jugation have been introduced by Jacob Grimm in the first edition of his German Grammar (1817). The following ideas have led to the universal adoption of the>e terms. A strong verb has strength enough in its root to dispense with the help of auxiliary ending in the imperfect (icf)iagert — fcfjhlfl); but the roots of weak verbs have no such power, attaching auxiliary endings for that purpose (lobert — lobtCU A strong xorx or adjective is one which forms distinctive endings, so that it may be declined without the help of an article, and yet show its case, gender and number (jjvtfcf) — ^tfd}e$, etc.), while — VI — we consider it greatly reprehensible to substitute for 'technical terms' expressions made by ourselves for whatever reason; not to mention the inconvenience arising from the use, along with our grammars, of German dictionaries in which the familiarity of the reader with such terms is presupposed. The owner of the word ought to determine its name. Should we not be greatly astonished, if in an English grammar, written in Germany, our terms 'possessive case, progressive form, potential mood, etc.' were ignored, and replaced by terms unintelligible to us? The reading pieces in Ahn's original Method are entirely omitted in this edition, being incorporated in Ahn's revised Reader. We close with the remark that (except the parts of Ahn's original work mentioned above) no use has been made and no authority followed of any existing grammar. We have tried to develop the different laws of the language from the material which during a close study of German literature for almost a quarter of a century, has accumulated under our hands. The form and wording given to our rules and their methodical arrangement are the results of our experience, during an almost equal period, as a teacher of German in College, in schools of both sexes, and as an instructor of private pupils. We doubt not that errors will be detected, and we shall be grateful to have our attention called to them. weak nouns and adjectives do not distinguish cases or numbers, and hence must have an auxiliary article or other word to show in what case, number or gender they are placed (fc>er flute, be§ QUtett, bem cpiteil, etc.; be$ £irtCll, bent §trtClt, etc.). Formerly the strong verbs were improperly called irre- gular or old verbs. New Brunswick, April 18th, 1871. Gustavus Fischer. The Pronunciation. a I. THE ALPHABET. The German Alphabet is composed of the following 26 letters: Written. Printed. Written. Printed. Written. Printed. *&> %r ; tf)re, Softer, 2#iif){e. 3. The letter c as lengthening sign occurs only after t. The combination ie is always pronounced like t (German) long: regteren, @teg, met, biefer. Obs. — But final te in some words taken from foreign languages is pro- nounced like English ia in Virginia: gattttlte, Suite, £i(te. The same is the case in regard to the endings ier of national nouns and ten, as: ©panier, ©attier, 2lften. 4. The doubling of vowels takes place with a, e and o, but not with t, u,or the softened vowels and the diphthongs. Obs. — Since very frequently the length of vowels is not indicated at all (see the examples above, No. II.), all these lengthening signs. are deemed superfluous, and modern orthography has a tendency to diminish them, and spell words with the simple vowels only. VII. CONSONANTS. 1. 33, b is pronounced as in English, but b final has the sound of p: ab, 2£etb r 2xieb. 2. £, c before e, t, \) a and o is pronounced like ts: Scifar, Sttrone, Stjlmber, Colibat, Geber. Before consonants, the vowels a, o, it, it, and at the end of words it is pronounced like h SctnteDcrt, (Eocarbe, Sreole, Stents Gutrie, Sitrafuer, ^tc. Obs. — The letter c is only used in words taken from foreign languages. Many writers have commenced to discard the use of c, if pronounced like t, and substitute the letter f for it. Words taken from the Greek should be al- ways spelled with !: $rittf, SofrateS. 3. §f), d), in the beginning of words, occurs only in words taken from foreign languages, and is generally pronounced like fc, as: gfyor, gfyrtft, gfjarafter. But before t it has the German />-*! 6 _ aspirate sound (see below): Gf)ina, Stjtntrg. In words taken from the French, it is pronounced like sh 1 when it has this pronunciation in French: 2()cf, Sfycmffee, Charlatan. In the middle or at the end of the word its pronunciation is twofold, depending on the preceding letter. Neither has an equivalent in English. It has a guttural sound after a, o, it, an: Dad), ntadjcn, Sod), podjert, Sbud), judjcn, and), raudjen. It has an aspirate sound after any other letter or diphthong: 33(ed), ftedjen, ^etdjen, riecfcen, 8id)t, mdcfytig, modjte, pdjtig, raud)ern, eud), 2ftabd)en, toeldjer, SRoSdjetu £f)3 or d)f is generally pronounced like x (Jcs) : 3Sad)3, fed)3, Sud)3, 4Sitd)fe. But if o or f belongs to an inflectional ending, or the d) belongs to a different radical in which the following 3 or f is not contained, the d) has either the aspirate or guttural sound: bc3 -33ud)3 (genitive of 23ud)), t]od)ft (superlative of fjod)), nctdjft (superlative of nafje), mad)) am (from nmdjen and fam), itad)* fet)en (from wad) and fcfyen). 4. 5), b at the end of words is pronounced like t: ?ctb, fibtb, ttnlb, bolb. 5. ©, g at the beginning of a syllable is pronounced like g in good: gefyen, grojs, SBagen, Icgen. At the end and the middle of syllables the pronunciation is not fully settled. After t and ie all give it the aspirate pro- nunciation of d): feltg, ©teg, fiegte. After n at the end of words it has the pronunciation of k: ©efang, lang, 3itng. After other letters some pronounce it invariably like g in good, while others give it the pronunciation of d), either aspirate or guttural ac- cording to the previous letter. Both pronunciations have equally good authority: Sag, 23}eg, legt, ragt, bcugt, faugt, 35ogt, Xntg. Obs. — Some pronounce g, if between two vowels, with a sound between d) and g (hard). This pronunciation is inelegant and has no good authority. In ©egetl. Sftegett, roagert, the g ought to be pronounced exactly as in good. It is best for beginners to pronounce g in all instances as g in good, except when it is final after tt or i. The student is then sure to have always an un- objectionable pronunciation. If ttg is not final it has the pronunciation of English ng in singer, bringer or springer, not as ng in longer, stronger or finger, as: ginger, latige, Sftertge, Sungling, fartgett. g in words taken from the French is pronounced, as it would he at the game place in th;;t language: hard in (Sonoenieiir, soft in dourage (softer than sh). 6. £), 1) at the beginning of words is pronounced like h in hill: fQau$, fyctrt, [)cben. In the beginning of syllables not initial, the aspiration is less perceptible: 9ictl)e, rauljcr. In the middle or at the end of syllables () is a sign of lengthening the preced- ing vowel, and is not pronounced: 33aljn, fritf), metjr. f- 3/ i ^ pronounced like the English consonant y in yet: 3al)v, Qod), ping. 8. ft, t is pronounced as in English, but is never mute: ftnte, Senate. In place of doubling I, the double consonant d is used, which is pronounced like Jc in bake, and always indicates that the previous vowel is short: baden, &M, 2lcfcr, Sdlid. 9. <£, \, 3. The long f is used in the beginning and middle of syllables; at the end of syllables the short 3 only is used. The capital @ and long f always are pronounced like English z in zeal; short 8 has always the sound of hissing s in Aats: ©omnter, 9ict|c, §aufcr, £>au$, [p$. ff always has the hissing sound of ss in passing: SBciffer, nnffen, mitfjen. This double letter can never stand at the begin- ning and at the end of words (except when Roman type is used). ft has the hissing sound of ss: guf$, gfbtf, ftiefjen, grog. If Roman type is used, ft is generally written ss: Fuss, Fluss, etc. (2d), fef) is pronounced like sA in shoe: 3tf)cttten, 3d)ule, !£ifd), fdjlafcn, fdjrocr, fdjrcten. <2t, ft, and (Sp, fp in the middle and at the end of syllables are pronounced as in English, but in the beginning of syllables they sound like slit, slip: beft, laften, 23e3pe, ©tein, fprmgen, toer* ftefyen. 10. %% t() is not pronounced like English th, but like simple t: Zl)at, xot% 2£uit), 3rrt()imi. 11. 93, t> has the sound of/. But in words, taken from foreign languages, it is pronounced like English v: SBater, Did, berfieljen, Dor; but 33emt§, SBincent Some pronounce u like Eng- lish v in the word gte&el. 12. SB, Id is pronounced like English v: SSelt, 23urje(, roolfen. 13. 3> 3 sounds like fa, never like English z: 3 a ¥> jat)m f jwet, £er$. £ has the same sound (tej, but is only used after a short vowel: 33ti§, Sftttfcen, fe§cn. VIII. ACCENTUATION AND SYLLABICATION. L In German as well as in English words, the principal accent is placed on the radical syllable. The stress imparted by the accent, is stronger in German than in English, 2. The secondary accent is more frequently applied in German than in English. Entirely without accent (obscure) are only those prefixes and endings which contain the vowel c. Thus the word ar'bcttfctm has its principal accent on the first syllable, and each of the other two syllables has a secondary accent. On the other hand the word Bertet'getibere has only one accent, which is on the second syllable, the first syllable being a prefix, and the third, fourth and fifth syllables inflectional endings, all of which are pronounced with the obscure sound. 3. Compound nouns have their principal accent on the radical syllable of the first component, as: $ihtg'ltng& Sitter. Verbs compounded with prepositions have their principal ac- cent generally on the preposition, as: cm'fcmgen. For other compound words the rules are more complicated, and should be learned by practice. 4. The syllables of German words are not divided accord- ing to English principles. Except in compound words, no re- gard is paid to the derivation of a word. Single consonants in the middle of a word belong to the following, not to the pre- ceding vowel, and of more than one succeeding consonants the first is joined with the preceding and the next with the following vowel. Thus we- divide: te*gett, £>Su*|er, lie*ben, although the consonants g, f, b belong in respect to derivation to the first syllables. — 8 — % PART I. l. Singular, id) bttt, I am; bu bift, thou art; er tft, he is; fte ift, she is; Plural, tore finb, we are; tf)t feib, you are; fte finb, they are. ©Ut, good; grog, great, large, big; fletrt, little, small; reid), rich; arm, poor; Jung, young; alt, old; miibe, tired; frartf, ill, sick. Qi) bin groft. ©it bift Item. (Sr ift aft. tabt t the town, city. Neuter nouns: bct§ $inb, the child; ba§ §Ctu3, the house. ©d)i3rt, beautiful, fine; tang, long; (jod), high; neu, new; unb, and; feljr, very. £)er 23ater ift gut. SDie Gutter ift traurtg. £)a3 tinb ift faut. £er ©artert ift ntdjt fefyr tang. £ie Stabt ift groB unb retcf). £a3 §au3 ift iticftt hod). Q}t ber ©artert frfjon? 3ft ber better franf? 3ft ba3 Stub nic^t fletfctg ? <$ft ba3 £au$ neu? 5Der SSoter unb bte SKuttcr finb gfiicfttd). Obs. — All German substantives begin with a capital letter. — When two or more substantives follow each other, the article must be repeated before each, unless they are all of the same gender. — The article (ber, bte, ba%) is different for the three genders. — The gender of nouns denoting persons is al- most always masculine for males, and feminine for females. — Objects not be- ing persons are either masculine, or feminine, or neuter. 6. The house is not new. The mother and (the)* child are ill. The town is very beautiful. The child is not naughty. The father is very old. The house and (the) garden are very large. Is the mother not happy ? The house is not very old. Is the garden not very fine ? The house is very small. ( Masc. biefer 33aunt, this tree. Demonstratives: ) Fern. bxefe fttatt, this woman. ( Xeut. btefee $ferf>, this horse. 2)er Sftcmtt, the man; o'er 33erg^ the mountain; bte SBlume, the flower; bat genfter, the window; off en, open; gufrtebeit, contented, satisfied, pleased; ©ber, or* * A parenthesis by which one or more words are enclosed, means that such words are not used in the language from which the translation is made, and that they must be translated, A bracket enclosing: a word denotes that the word is employed in the language only from which the translation is made. Such words must be omitted in translating. — 10 — £)iefer 2ftcum ift fetjr arm. £)iefe$ gcnftcr ift fefjr t)od). ©tefe ffilunte ift fdjon. DicfeS $ferb ift ping unb ftarl. 3ft btefe grau gliicf (id) ? SMefer 23ater unb btefe gutter finb nidjt jufrieben. £)iefer J23aum ift fefyr groft. ©tefe grau ift "arm unb Irani. £)iefe$ Sinb ift fefjr bofe. Dicfer 3Kann ift nidjt fjfiflid). ©ift bu traurig obcr Irani? This woman is tired. This mountain is not high. Is this child good or naughty? This man is not satisfied. This child is not very diligent. Is this garden small or large ? Art thou not contented ? This window is not open. Is this house old or new ? This tree is very fine. Is this man rich or poor ? This town is very dull (langweUig). Masc. Fern. Neut. Indefinite article: em, PossessiVes: -j nteut, bein, erne, em, a; meine, beine, mem, betn, my; thy. S)er SBrubet, the brother; bte @d)tt)eftef, the sister; bte geber, the pen; bct§ iBud), the book; ber greitltb, the friend; $arl, Charles; £ntfe, Louisa; tt)0, where; fyter, here; nod), still, yet; abet, but. 9J?etn 33ruber ift traurig. SKcine ©djtnefter ift Irani. SJfein 33ud) ift fd)6n. Q\t bein ©arten grop ? 3ft betne geber gut? 3ft bein $ferb Hein? $ar(ift nod) em kinb. Berlin ift etne ©tabt. 8utfe ift meine ©d)it>efter. ©em 33ruber ift ntein greunb. ©etn SSatcr ift nidjt fjier. 9So ift ntein 33ud) ? 3ft ntein 33ucf) ntdjt f)ier? 3ft beine gutter nod) Irani? Qd) bin nod) nidjt ntitbe, aber bein 33ruber unb beine @d)tt)efter finb fefyr ntube. ^ 10. Charles is my brother. This child is my sister. Thou art my friend. Thy garden is very large. Where is thy mother ? A friend is faithful. Is this child thy brother ? This horse is still young. Where is my pen ? Thy pen is here. Louisa is still a child. Thy brother is idle . My friend is very diligent* — 11 — 11. Masc. Fern. NeuU ( unfet Possessives: 1 euer, \ ' urtjere, euere, iljre, ttlijer, our; euer, your; iljr, their. £)er ®ol)tt, the son; bit always. ZofyteT, the daught er; tie Satire, the door; immer, Obs. — The third person plur. of the English possessive (their), and the second person plur. of the personal pronoun {you) are translated by the same word \j)X. Whether in a given sentence tfyr is a possessive or a personal pro- noun must be determined by the connection. The personal pronouns bit and its plural itjr, and the corresponding pos- sessive Dettl and euer are used to address near relatives, intimate friends and children. g)il and bent refer to one person, ifyr and euer to more than one. Other persons less intimately connected, are addressed by the third per- son plural of the personal pronoun ((Bit) and the same person of the possessive (3fyr), which are then written with a capital initial: (Bit finb, you are (lit- erally they are); 3>fyr greimb, your friend (literally their friend). It makes here no difference whether one person is addressed or more than one. Thus the German ifyv (3fyr) may have three meanings: you, your, their. For a fourth meaning (her) see No. 25, Uttfer ©ctrtett ift grofc. Urtjere SBhttter tft Iran!, llnfer ^fcrb tft fd)6n. £)iefer SSKaxtn tft urifer 2?ater. Gucr Prober ift T)ier. $art ift euer 33ruber unb Strife euere ©djmefter. (Siter §aug ift grofj. ©iefer 9Wcam imb biefe gran finb fefjr traurtg; ifjr ®ofpn ift immer franf. £ar( unb 8uife finb gfticflidj; iljre 9)htttcr tft jufrte ben. Sty fcib traurtg; tft euer Sater nod) Irani? 3ft Ofyr Sofjtt ffeigig ? $ft $ljre £od)ter jufrteben? So ift 3^ 23ucf)? ^fjre Satire tft immer offen. ©inb Sie mein greunb ? @inb ©ie nod) jufrieben ? 12. Our father is good. Our mother is little. Our house is great. Thy father is our friend. Your town is beautiful. Your garden is large. Your horse is small. Charles and Louisa are sad ; their mother is sick. This man and this woman are happy; their friend is here. Your son is not al- ways diligent. Is your child sick ? Is Charles not your friend ? Where is your sister? They are not here; they are sick. You are tired, and your sister is sad. Are you not sick ? — 12 13. $fein, little, small; fletner, smaller; alt, old; alter, older; grog, great; grower, greater; jung, young; junger, younger; ftetjStg, diligent; fleifetger, more diligent. 9?ut3tid), useful; ungliicfftdj, unhappy; ber §unb, the dog; bie $a£e, the cat; bte ^onne, the sun; bcr Sftonb, the moon; a(3, than, as. Obs. — In forming the comparative of an adjective, the radical vowel a generally changes into d; into 5; and u into it. All comparatives, without exception, are formed by adding er to the positive. Sttetrt 53rubcr ift alter ate id). 3d) bin j;iinger ate utein greimb. $arf tft grower ate 8uife. £)iefer 9)2ann tft grower ate nrir. 5Det £wtb tft tretter ate bte $a£e. £)a3 Spferb ift fdjoner unb nii£(id)er ate ber §nnb. £5iefe3 $inb tft fleiptger ate bit. @tc finb gtucflidjcr ate 3f)r Prober. $arl tft ftarfcr ate id;. Sir finb gufriebener ate ifyr. 8nife tft f)6flid)er ate beine @tf)tt>eftcr. 3ft -3l)r .©ruber pmger ate^ie? Sr ift alter, aber Hewer ate id) unb @te. Qr ift urn gttitf (idjer ate @ie, aber Sie finb trauriger ate cr. 14. My brother is more diligent than thou. Thou art not younger than he. He is taller and stronger than I. Your son is younger than this child. The moon is smaller than the sun. Art thou older than I ? This dog is finer than this cat. Your sister is politer than you. I am more contented than thou. You are richer than we. We are more unhappy than you. This dog is more useful than your horse. Is your sister older than my mother ? 15. ©ut, good; beffer, better; fyod), high; I)5t)cr, higher; Demonstrative monouns ■ i bic 1 cr ' bie ' e ' biefe8 ' this ' this one; Uemonstrative pronouns, -j .^^ .^ .^ ^ that ^ 2)a3 (Sefen, the iron; ba§ iBIet, the lead; ber er Stat)t ift tjarter ate ba$ (Sifen. ©iefer ©erg ift fjoljer ate jener. Die $afce ift nicb't fo treu ate bcr £mnb. £)a3 S&Ui ift nidjt fo fyart ate ba3 ©fen. 3ft 3ljr £>au3 md)t grower ate jene£ ? 3ft ba£ 33(ei tljeurer ate ba$ (Stfetx ? ©er 9ftonb ift nidjt fo grofe ate bie Srbe. ©iefe$ ®inb ift ftetgtger ate jene^. Qmt grau ift armer ate biefe. Unfcr ©arten ift txtcfjt fo tang unb fdjon ate biefer. 16. (The) lead is heavier than (the) iron. This tree is not so high as that. Is this book not better than that ? Our garden is smaller than this one. This house is higher than that one. (The) iron is more useful than (the) lead. I am not so old as he. (The) lead is not so dear as (the) steel. Our town is larger and finer than this one. We are not so rich as this man, but we are more contented than he. 11. Singular, id) fyabe, I have; A bit fyaft, thou hast; er, fie fyat, he, she has;- • Plural. ftnr fyaben, we have; it)V fyabt, @te fyaben, you have; fie fyaben, they have. £)teUfyr, the watch; ba% iDfcffer, the knife; Sftecfyt, right; Unrecfyt, wrong; §etnrtd), Henry; Snbttng, Lewis; fur, for; and), also; toarum, why. — I am right, lam wrong, id) fyabe Sftecfyt, id) fyabe Unrecfyt (not id) bin Sftecfyt or Unrecfyt). Qd) fjabe SJedjt. ©u I>aft ttnredjt. Qd) fyabe ein 53urf>. £)u fyaft eine geber. 2ttein ©ruber fyat eine Ufyr. Sir fyaben ein §au$. 3fyr fyabt ein ^ferb. $art unb gnife fyaben eine ta^e. £>aft bu eine ©cfyrcefter? £at biefer 2ttann eine Stouter? §abt ifyr ein tinb? £)iefe Ufyr ift fur tneine SUhttter. £)iefe geber ift fur tart. §aben @ie nocfy 3fyre SDhttter ? SBarum fyaft bu mein 3Reffer ? 3cfy tjabe beta SKeffer nicfyt. — 14 18. Charles, hast thou my pen? Louisa, hast thou my book ? Henry has thy pen, and Lewis has thy book. Thou art right. My son is wrong. We have a book and a pen. Have you also a horse and a watch ? This knife is for Henry. Is this watch for thy mother? Has your friend a knife? Charles and Lewis have a horse. Has your father still a sister? Is^this flower for my daughter ? Are you right or wrong ? Have you my pen? I have not your pen. 19. Past Participles: gefauft, bought; Detfauft, sold; gefltttbett, found; oeru> ren, lost; genommett, taken; gefefyen, seen. Obs, — In all principal sentences the past participle is detached from the auxiliary and placed at the end of the sentence, — -L^od) tud)t (not md)t nod)), not yet. $$) tjabe mem 33ud) uerloren. §aft bit mem Sfteffer gefunben? QA) fyabe bein 3Jieffer tttcfyt gefunben. 28o tft metne geber? £abt it)r metne geber ? SBtr fyaben betne geber ntdjt. SSJicin 33ater Ijat btefeS ^ferb gefauft. SBtr Ijabeit unfer £)aus berfcmft. So f^aft bit metne Uf)r gefunben? SSarum fyaben @te metne U^r genommen? $i) Ijctbe Qfyvt 2Jtutter unb $fjre Sdjiuefter gefefyen. SBarum fyai Qtjv SSater btefe$ £)au$ md)t gefauft? £mt betn 33ruber metne geber ge* nommen ? Gr Ijat betne geber md)t genommen. §abeu @te metne U(}r uod) md)t gefunben ? 20. Where hast thou found this book ? Have you lost your pen ? Has your father bought this horse ? Why have you sold your watch ? Why have you not taken my pen ? My brother has found thy knife. We have seen thy mother. I have not yet seen this w^oman. Charles and Lewis have lost their mother; they are very sad. 21. Nominative. Accusative. Objective. 2)er $ater, ben $ater, the father; biefer $ater, biefen $ater, this father. — 15 — 3)er $omg, the king; ber §ut, the hat; ber @toef, the stick, the cane; ber 33rtef, the letter; oft, often; fd)0tt, already. Past Participles : gefdjrieben, written; erfyalten, received. Obs. — The direct object is placed in the accusative case. The accusative in the neuter and feminine is the same as the nominative. — If the article or pronoun belongs to two coordinate nouns of different genders, the article and pronoun must be repeated in German before every noun: ber $ater Uttb bte Sftlttter, the father and mother* 3?dj I)abe ben ®omg gefefyen. £aft bit ben 33rtef erljattett? 9Jietne ©cfiroefter Ijat ben ^Brief nod) nidjt gefdjrteben. §einrtd) ljat hm ©totf fcerioren. SDlein 25ater fyat btefen ©arteit nnb biefeS £)au$ gcfauft. So Ijabt tl)r btefett S)nnb nnb btefe $a£e gefnnben ? $d) fyabe btefen Sftamt fdpn oft gefeljen. SBarum Ijaben @ic btefen §nt genommen? 2Btr l)aben btefen 4Brtef gefnnben. §at betn -©ruber btefen ©toe! fcerloren ? 22. . We have sold the house and the garden. Have you bought this dog and this horse ? I have seen the man and woman, the son and daughter. I have not written this letter. Where have you found this book and cane ? Has thy brother bought this tree ? This letter is for this man. Hast thou lost this hat ? Hast thou not taken this book and pen ? Hast thou already seen the king ? I have not yet seen the king. 23. Mm. ctn@ortcn f ) d Mm. mem §mtb, ! mvdo2 , Accus. einen ©arten, f a & araen - Accus. metnen Jpunb, j y g ' £)er SBogef, the bird; ber ©tufyt, the chair; ber %\\&), the table; ber 33(etfttft, the pencil; ber -ftadjbar, the neighbor; frorj, Dergniigt, glad. Obs. — The accusative masculine sing, of all adjective pronouns (See No. 9, 11, 15) is formed by the ending en. The e of this ending is generally- dropped in unfer and euer (imfern, euertt). — The preposition fur requires the next noun in the accusative. SWcin ©ruber ift fefyr f rot) ; er Ijat etnen 25oge(. §dft bu einen ©rief erfyalten? Qdj fjabc metnen §nt aertoren. £)aben@te metnen §nnb fdjon gefefyen? SStr Ijaben etnen Z\)<$) unb @tuf)t gefauft. — 16 — SWein -©ruber Ijat betnen ©tod genommen. SSo Ijaft bu betnen $8ku ftift gefauft? 3Btr Ijaben unferuSSater unb unfere SJhitter Derloren. 3d) fyabe ^fyren 33ricf nidjt erljaften. §at bent ©ruber unjem ©ar- ten unb unfer £)au3 fcfyott gefe^en? Unfcr 9?ad)bar fyat ben $ontg gefefyen. $aft bu biefeu SSogei gefauft ober jenen? 24. We have lost our dog. This man has lost a son and a daughter. Where have you' found my pencil? Have you al- ready seen my brother and mother ? I have bought a hat for my sister. Our neighbor has found thy knife and cane. Where hast thou bought this table ? Thy brother has taken my chair. Have you written a letter ? We have found this stick and that one. We have not seen your pen. I have written this letter for my father. 25. Nam. fein, feme, fern, { -- .. itjr, tyre, tyr, i h Accus. feinen, feme, fein, j ' " iljren, tfyre, ifyr, ) ©efefen, read (past participle); gefannt, known; ber Dnfel, the uncle; bte Xante, the aunt; ber gtngertjnt, the thimble; bie ^djeere, the scissors; grcm, wife, woman. 2ftetu greimb ift traurig; fein SSater unb fetue gutter finb Irani. SJJeine £ante ift jufrieben; ifyr ©ofyn unb ifyre £od)ter finb feijr flet^ig. £>emrtd) fjat feinen ©tocf, feine Ut)r unb fein 2#effer t>er^ toren. fiutfe I)at ifyren gingerlntt, itjre geber unb iljr $8ud) fcerloren. (Sner Dnfel l)at fein £au8 unb feinen ©arien Derfauft. £)iefe grau l)at ifjren Sftann unb ifjr Stub Dertoren. £)tefe £od)ter t)at einen 33rtef fiir tfyre 2Kutter gefd)rieben. $art tjat feinen 33ater ntd)t ge* fannt. SDic £ante l)at beinen unb ntetuen iBrief gelefeu. 26. The father has lost his son. The mother has lost her daughter. My uncle has sold his watch. Our aunt has sold her scissors. Henry has found his pencil Louisa has found her thimble. I have seen this man and his son, this woman and her daughter. My mother has lost her pen and her knife. My brother has taken his hat. I have seen your aunt; hai she still her horse? This man is very sad; he has lost hid wife. Charles has written a letter for his father. My aunt has bought this book for her son, 27. Nominative, tie gutter, the mother; Mefe 3Jftttter, this mother; Genitive. ber WttitttV, of the mother; biefer 2ft utter, of this mother. £>ie 9fta$b, the maid -servant; tie ^btugtrt, the queen; Me -Tcacrjbartn, the (female) neighbor. Past Participles : augefomtnen, arrived; abgeretft, departed. S5tc 3Rutter ber Sontgin ift cmgefommert. SDer 23ater ber ^lad)* bartn ift abgereift. Q&) fyabe ben ©artett ber Xante gefetjen. §aben <2ie ben ©leiftift ber@djtpefter gefunbeu ? ©iefe yxau ift bic Sdjwt* fter ber 9?ad)bartn. j)iefer 2Karot ift ber ©ruber ber 3Ragb. 25a$ Stnb biefer grew ift immer Iranf. 28/ The hat of the mother is beautiful. The sister of the queen is not beautiful. Is the father of the servant arrived ? Are you the brother of the (female) neighbor ? I am the sister of this woman. Hast thou taken the chair of the sister ? Have you seen the horse of the aunt ? We have known the father of this servant. The pencil of this woman is too small. 29. Masc. Nom. ber $ater, the father; biefer 33ater, this father; ^ Gen. be§ Waters, of the father; MeieS 2*ater3, of this father; Neuter. Norn. ba§ £inb, the child; biefeS $inb, this child; Gen. bee &inbe$, of the child; Mejes £inbee, of this child. SDer <2>d)ur)macrjer, the shoemaker; ber ^djnetber, the tailor; ber (Partner, the gardener; ber #aufmatm, the merchant; ber&rgt, the physician; b(X3 ^tmmer, the room; ba3 %$oit, the people; ber £errfd)er, the ruler. Obs. — All masculine and neuter nouns ending in ev, et, en take $ in the genitive singular. All other neuter and most of the other masculine nouns, not ending in e, take e§ or § in the genitive. Feminine nouns are indeclinable in the singular. Die SDiagb be3 ©djnetberS ift front £>er©ol)tt be3 %latf)bax% ift nod) feljr pmg. £>te Slume be$ ©artnerS ift fefyr fd)6n. Der @ar* — 18 — ten be$ ®5nig§ ift fefyr grop. £)er $onig ift ber §crrfd>er be$ 23otfe$. £>ie grou be3 2trjte$ ift immer jufrieben. Qd) Ijabe ben ©arten be$ DnfelS gefefyen. SStr fyaben ba$ ^ferb be$ HaufmannS gefauft. §aft bn ben Sletftift be3 33ruber3 genommen ? 2Bo ift bie 9ttagb be3 ®d)ut)mad)er3? £>ie £l)i'tre be3 3^ nTrrter ^ $ intmer off en. £>ie Softer biefeS SftanneS ift abgereift. Sir Ijaben bie ^flutter biefeS Sinbe8 gefannt. £)er ©arteu biefes £>aufe3 ift Kern. 30. This man is the brother of the gardener. This woman is the sister of the shoemaker. This child is the son of the tailor. The door of the house is not open. I have seen the son and daughter of the physician. We have seen the horse of the merchant. The servant of the neighbor is the sister of this gardener. Why is the door of this room open ? We have known the son of this merchant. The dog of the neighbor is faithful. The mother of this child is arrived. 31. Mm-, em SBater, cine Gutter, em $mb; Gen. eines Waters, einer Sautter, eines $tnbe$. 3)er 9tegettfd)trm, the umbrella; ba$ gfebermeffer, the penknife; geftern, yester- day. Obs.— The pronouns tttein, betn, fettt, iijt, Uttfer, euer, are declined like em, cine, em; jetter (that) is declined like btefer. @tnb @ie ber ©ofyn eineS SCrjteS? 3d) bin ber ©oljn eineS ®aufmcmn$. $abm ©ie ba$ £)er ©ruber beineS greuubefc ift geftern angefommen. 23Jo ift ber SRegeu* fd)irm beineS Dnfete ? £wft bu ba$ gimmzx metner ©cfyroefter ge* feljen? Sir fyaben ben 53rief beiner 2ttutter gefef en. 3Dtem Dnlci Ijat ba$ §au$ $f)re3 SSaterS gefauft. Qd) Ijabe ben ©tpcf Qi)tc$ ©rubers fcertoreu. £>er ©arten unferS* 9?ad)bar$ ift fefyr grog. Unfere 9Kagb ift bie Softer eureS ©drtner^. 9£o ift ber 9?egen* fdjirm unfercr SDiutter ? tart t)at ben gingerfjut feiner ©djtoefter ge* nommen. Cuife fyat ba$ gebermeffer ttjrer Zantt genommen. £)ie STOutter jeneS SinbeS ift franf. £>er @oljn fener grew Ijat mem Sfteffer gefunben. — 19 — 32. I have found the hat of the child. Are you the servant of mv uncle? I am the servant of your tailor. The penknife of thy brother is very good. The pen of thy sister is not good. The house of our aunt is large. Henry has lost the letter of his father. Louisa has found the pen of her brother. Is the garden of our uncle as fine as this one? (See Xo. 15.) We have found the hat of your neighbor's son (the hat of the son of your neighbor). Lewis has read the letter of his friend. Louisa has bought a flower for a child of her sister. 33. Norn, ber 23ruber, the brother; Dat. bem iBritbet, to the brother; Norn. ba§ SBud), the book; bte ®d)U)cfter, the sister; Dat. bem 23ud)e, to the book; ber (Sdjroefter, to the sister. SYNOPSIS. Mm. ber, bte, ba%, btefer, btefe, btefeS; Gen. be§, ber, be3, bteieS, btefer, biefeS; Dat. bem, ber, bem, btefem, biejer, biefem; Ace. ben, bte, ba%, btefen, btefe, btefes. ©e^ort, belongs. Pant Participles: gelteljett, lent; gegebett, given; gefd)tcft, sent; fcerfprod)en, promised; ge^eigt, shown. X\t greunbttt, the (female) friend. Obs. 1. — The dative singular of nouns ending in er, el, eit takes no end- ing. The dative singular of nouns that take e§ or 8 in the genitive has the ending e, but this ending may be always dropped. 2. The dative generally precedes the accusative. 3. The English emphatic form of the verb, formed by the auxiliary to do must always be rendered by the common form in German, without any auxiliary: Does he belong (belongs he), gefjort er? He does not belong (he be- longs not), er gefyort rtidjt. $)iefe$ $cw3 gefyort bem Dnfet mehteS 9vCtd)bctr£. fetter ©arten gef)brt ber Xante metneS greimbeS. Qti} t)abe bem SSater einenSrtef gefdjricben. ©ie fyat ber gmmbut ifyrer ©djroefter eine SQlvmt gege* ben. $art fjat ber ©d)tt>efter fctn gebermeffer geftefyett. §aft bit bem Slr^te mcirt 23ud) gefdjirft? Qi) Ijabe biefem Stube emeu 23oge( fcerjprodjen. £>emvid) Ijat biefer grau unfern 9?egenfd)irm geUcfccu. — 20 — Strife f)ctt Mefem SKanne nnfern ©arten gejeigt. $&) fyabe meine geber bent gmmbe meineS 33rnber3 gegeben. ©teje$ 33nd) gel)brt metnem 2$ater nicfyt. 34. This hat belongs to the gardener. This house belongs to the mother of my friend. I have written to my uncle and aunt. My sister has lent her thimble to the friend (fern.) of your brother. My uncle has sent a watch to the son of your neighbor (fern.). Have you given a chair to this child? Have you lent an umbrella to this woman ? Does this garden belong to the king ? No, it belongs to the sister of the king. We have sold our horse to the friend of our uncle. Does this knife belong to this or that servant ? 35. Nam. ein SButf), a book; erne geber, a pen; Bat. einem iBudje, to a book; etner geber, to a pen. £)er ^Better, ber £ouftn, the cousin, bte 23afe, bte (Souftne, the (female) cousin; $tm a lie, Amelia; bie (Mrtnertn, the (female) gardener or the gardener's wife. a a iTok K? itS 8 ' } «» »»* ~ Setter. ' SYNOPSIS. Nam. ein, etne, ein, mein, meine, metn, unfer, nnfere, unfer; Gen. etne§, etner, etne$, meine£, meiner, metneS, nnjereS, unjerer, unfereS; DaU einem, etner, einem, metnem, meiner, metnem, unferem, nnjerer, unjerem; Ace. einen, etne, ein, metnen, metne, metn, nnferen, unjere, mtjer.* liefer ©arten gefyort einem ©cfmfymadjer. £5tefe3 SD&ffer gefybrt etner 9ttagb. ?nife l)at metnem SSater einen ^Brief gefdjrieben. £>einrid) ljat meiner SJhttter etne 33fame gegeben. 3d) I)abc 3fyrem Onfcl metn ^3ferb cjelte^eu. @te fyaben unferer Xante 3fjr §an3 Derfanft. £art §at (einem grennbe ein 33nd) gefd)icft. Slmatte ijat ifyrer grennbtn einen gingerfjnt geliefjen. ©iefer 3Kann f)at enrer ^iadjbarin einen SSogel gefdjtdt. §aft bn metnem 23ater biefe Ufyr gegeben? §abt itjr nnferer Safe einen 33(ei[tift gettefjen? (Sine 3Jiagb meiner SKutter ljat ifyren gingerljnt uertoren. * The e ot the ending is generally dropped in unferS, unjerm, tinfem. 21 36. I have lent my pen to a friend of my brother's. Hast thou given thy cat to a friend (fern.) of my sister's ? We have given the letter to a servant of the physician's. Have you sent this flower to our gardener ? This garden belongs to my cousin (masc. and fern.). This umbrella does not belong to your brother. Does this pen belong to thy brother or to thy sister? Has Henry written to his father or to his mother?' Has Louisa written to her uncle or aunt ? Have you seen the gardener's wife ? I have not seen her, but I have seen her brother. 37. 3d) fpvedje, I speak, or I am speaking, or I do speak; tuir fpredjeit, we speak, or we are speal^irjg, or we do speak; id) roerbe geltebt, I am loved; er nnrb geltebt, be is loved. Obs. — The preposition rjOtt, of, from, is followed by the dative: oort bem Skater (of, from the father). Of is translated by the genitive, if it depends on a substantive : the father of the friend, ber SBater be§ greunbeS. Of is translated by t>ott, if it depends on a verb, not governing the genitive. Verbs governing the genitive will be marked as such: I speak of thy father, id) fpred)e i)ott beinem SBatcr. By governed by a passive verb is translated by t)0tt with the dative: 3$ toerbe Don metnem t^ofyne ejetiebt, I am Joved by my son. Q&) Ijabe ba% 23ud) be$ States gcfeljen. §aben ©te biz\t% 33ud) Don bem Strjte erljdten? 2£tr tjaben ben ©arten unferS 9?ad)bar3 gefauft §aben ©ie bicjert ©arten don $f) rem 9?ai)bar gefauft? $d) fyabe btefe Uf)t* Don metnem Dnfcl erljatten. £etnrtd) fyat etnen 4Brief t)on fetnem 3Satcr unb fetner 9)?uttcr ertjalten. Qd) fpredje Don bem Sontge unb ber Sonigin. 2Btr fprecfjen Don -Severn .©ruber unb Qtyzv @d)toeftcr, Don btefem 3Kamte unb btefer grau. ©predjen ©te Don metnem 23etter ober metner 4Bafc? §einrid) tturb Don fetnem S3ater unb feiner 2)2utter geltebt 38. I have received this horse from my friend. I have bought this eat of thy sister. Louisa has received an umbrella from — 22 — her uncle and a watch from her aunt. I speak of this dog and of this cat, of this bird and of this flower. We are speaking of your cousin (masc. and fern.). Amelia is loved by her uncle and aunt. Our (fern.) gardener has received a letter from her son and daughter. Henry is the son of this shoemaker and Louisa is the daughter of this tailor. 39. ©djon, beautiful; fd)5ner, more beautiful; ber fdjonfte, the most beautiful; gut, good; beffer, better; ber befte, the best; l)0d), high; fyofyer, higher; ber i)5d)[te, the highest. 2)a3 Stfyier, the animal; ber £oroe, the lion; ber Sttger, the tiger; ba% Sftetatf, the metal; bd$ ©tlber, the silver; ba% @olb, the gold. Obs. — The superlative is formed by adding fie or efte, and softening the radical vowel, that is changing a into a, into o and u into ii. 3Me $a£e ift md)t fo [tar! ate ber $unb. £)er Bwt ift ftarler afe ber £iget\ £)er gome ift ba$ ftarffte Sfyier. 9ftein 9tacpar ift reidjer ate @ie; er ift ber reidrfte 9Rann ber ©tabt. 35a$ ©olb ift fdjmerer ate ba$ ©tlber. $5a8 (Sifen ift nufettcfyer ate ba3 ©tfber. £)a£ (Stfen ift ba3 ttiifetidtfte detail guife ift fdjoner ate Slmalie; aber ^einricf) ift i*a% fdjonfte Sinb. gubttrig ift jiinger ate bu; er ift ber {imgfte ©oi)n unferS 9?ad)bar3. $ar( ift alter ate idj; er ift ber attefte ©oljn metneS Dnt'efe. £)er §unb ift fefyr treu. T)er ipmib ift ba$ trcuftc £l)ier. $5iefeS 33ud) ift beffer ate jeneS. £)u bift ber befte greunb metneS ©rubers. £)a3 £>au3 bicfcS SaufmanneS ift ba$ Ijocfyfte ber ©tabt <2ie ift bie bofefte grau ber ©tabt. 40. Louisa is very beautiful; she is more beautiful than her sister, but the most beautiful child is Amelia. This tailor is the happiest man in (of the) town. Henry is more diligent than Lewis, but Charles is the most diligent son of your friend. He is the oldest, but also the most wicked man in town. You are not so poor as my cousin, but the poorest man is my father. My chair is too high: this one is higher; but the highest chair belongs to my mother. Your pen is very good; my pen is better; but the best pen is that (bie) of my father. — 23 — 41. INTERROGATIVE SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. Kom. Xotx, who? Dat. tvtm, to whom ? don ttiem, of whom, from whom ? Ace. tt>ert, whom ? fur ruert, for whom ? Norn, and Ace. \va$, what ? (?§,it; etroaS, something, anything; md)t$, nothing, not— anything; Semano, somebody, anybody; Dhemanb, nobody, not — anybody; ba f there. Obs. — The personal pronoun of the third person has three genders: er, he; fie, she; e£, it. If the English it refers to things, masculine in German, it is not translated by e$, but by er; if it refer/5 to things of feminine gender, it is translated by fie; if to neuters by ee: the chair — it is high, bev Stltfyf — er ift f)od); the flower — it is beautiful, tie SBhrme — f t e if! |d)6n; the book — it is useful, ba§ 23ud)— e 3 ift nufchd). JB&tt ift ba? (23 ift ber ©djttetber; e3 ift §etnrid). Ser ift jener aftamt? g3 ift ber Scfynfymadjer; c3 ift ber 2o()tt be$ 2(r$te$. Ser fyat biefen $rief gefefyricben? Sent gefjort biefer Jpunb ? Grr grijiirt unferm 3laSfbav. Sent gefyort bicfc Ufyr? Sie geljort mcincr ©djtuefter. Sent Ijaben (gie ben &\\t gcgeben ? 23on mem fyaben @ic bicfc $3tume erfjatten? Sen Ijabcn Sie gefefjen? Sa$ fjaben Sie Dcriorcn? $d) l)abe nidjts ucrlorcn. $abm Sie etmaS gefim* bctt? So iff dip ©ruber ? gr ift mdjt fjier. 3ft ^emanb ba ? SRiemanb ift ba. §at ^emanb metne geber genommen? SRiemanb !)at fie genommen. 42. Who is there? It is my tailor; it is Charles. Who is that woman? She is the wife of the shoemaker; she is the servant of the neighbor. To whom have you lent your knife ? To the son of the gardener. To whom has your brother sold his dog? To the sister of my friend. From whom hast thou received this bird ? From the father of this woman. What have you bought? I have not bought anything (bought nothing). Of whom do you speak ? I am speaking of your cousin. Has anybody read my letter? Nobody has read your letter. Have you seen anything ? I have seen your watch. It is here. For — 24 — whom have you sent this chair ? It belongs to your father. To whom does that pen belong ? It belongs to my gardener (fern.). Whom have you sent? I have sent my maid-servant. Where is my pen? It is not here; it is there. 43. INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVE PP.ONOUNS. Mm. uietcfyer, toetcfye, iueldjeS, which or what; Dat U)e(d)em, tt>e(d)er, roefdjem, to which, to what; Ace. iDefdjetl, ft>eld)e, tt)e(d)e§, which, what (objective case). 2)ei* £ifd)ter, the joiner; bcr iftocf, the coat; in, in or into; mtt, with; bet, with (at the house of). Past Participles: gegemgen, gone; auSgegcmgen, gone out; gejprod)eu, spoken; gemad)t, made, done. Obs. — (1) What is translated by tt)eld)er etc. only if followed by a noun. (2) The prepositions mitand bet govern the dative (mtt loent, with whom etc.). (3) The preposition in governs the dative, if it corresponds to in, the accu- sative, if it means into. Setter £tfd)ier Ijat btefen Z\\ti) gemadjt ? SS3etcf)c 9ftagb ^at btefen ©rtef gefdjrteben ? SBcIdjcn Jpimb fyabett @te gefauft ? SSelcfye UI)r I)aft bit uerforcn? SBcIc^cS $aui Ijat 3fy: 93atcr Dcrfauft? 95on tt)rid)cm S>oIfe fpredjcu @ie ? SJJit tt)e(d)cm greunbe bift bu auSgegangen? Qn wddjmx ©arten Ijat er ben 33oget gefunben? 9£>eid)e gcber fjaft bit ba? Setdjer gran l)aft bu.bcin 2Reffer gegc^ ben ? SSo l)aben @tc metnen ©ruber gefefjen ? 59et $f)rem Dnfet, bet O^rcr SJJutter. Wit wddjcv gran Ijabcn @ie geftern gefprodjeu? Witt bcr gran memeS 9?ad)bar3. ffio tft ©em ©ruber ? Sr tft in ntetnem £>aufe; er tft bet metner 2Kutter; bet bent ©drtner. Sr tft in ben ©arten gegangen. Sari f)at fetnen ©ruber in ba$ ^imtftcr gefd)tdt. SSoti toem tyaben @ie biefe UI)r gefauft ? 3^ f) abe H e to bem ©arten gefunben. 44. Where is your sister ? She is in her garden. With whom has she spoken? With her cousin (fern.). Where is your cousin ? He is with (at the house of) his friend. Is your father — 25 — gone out ? He is gone out with the physician. Which letter have you written ? What book have you read? What have you found in the garden ? Which pen have you taken ? What house have you bought in (the) town? I have yesterday spoken with your brother at the house of your neighbor. From what gardener hast thou received this flower ? Wliere have you lost your thimble ? At the house of my father. With whom has (ift) your brother departed? Which cane have you lost? Have you sent the maid-servant into the garden? I have sent the servant into the house of my father. Has (3ft) Charles gone into his room ? What tailor has made this coat ? My sister has made it for her brother. 45. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. ** |K* er ' bif C ' Si** } -hoo, which (that); »* { K^'S^'ff" 1 } to whom, to which; Acc ' | ben, bte, bag J wh <> m » w^ch, that (obj. case). §)er 3fyfel, the apple; bte 33tme, the pear; ber ©djfiler, the scholar, the pupil; jematS, ever. Past Participles: cjegeffett, eaten; cjefyeift, dined. Obs. — (l)Relative pronouns are placed in the gender of the preceding noun to which they refer (antecedent). — (2) Clauses beginning with a relative pronoun, require the auxiliaries to be placed at the end, immediately after the participles. — (3) In such clauses simple verbs without participles are also placed at the end of the clause. SBtr fyaben etnen ©ruber, ttetejer (ber) feljr groft ift. 3#* l)abt cine ©djwefter, tt>etrf)e (bic) fetjr fiein ift. 9)tan (Sofyn l)at em ©udj, mlti)& (ba$) fefyr nufcttd) ift. £)er ©arten, toetcfyen (ben) bein Onfct gefauft fyat, ift feljr-fdjon. ©ie geber, toeldje metn better gefunben l)at, ift fefyr gut. 3d) f)abe ba$ £>au$ gefefyen, luel^e^ $f)r SSater gefauft l)at. £aben @ic etnen gingerljut gefunben, ben metne &d)m? fter cerloren fyat ? §aft bu ben 2fyfe( gegeffen, toetdjen in in bem ©arten gefunben fyaft ? 3d) fyabe bte iBirne gegeffen, bic tdj in ber ©tabt gefauft fyabe. §)ier ift ber Sttann, tteldjem ©te Qi}xm 33rtef gegeben fyaben. §ier ift bte gran, ttjetcfjer ttnr imfero §mnb fcerfauft — 26 — fjaben. £ncr ift ber 2frjt, Don bem nrir fo oft foremen, gin 9ttann, ber Don ctncm greunbe getiebt ttnrb, ift reid). £)ier ift mein 9?ad)bar, bei bem id) geftern gefpeift fyabe. 233o ift fyty Sreunb, mit bcm 2ie geftern gefprodjen fyaben? Sari ift ber befte ©djiiler, ben id) jemate gefannt fjabe. (S8 ift ba$ tljeuerfte 33ud), ba3 id) jemate gefauft Ijabe. £)a3 23nd), in ipekfyem bn getefen fyaft, ift nid)t gnt. 46. I have a dog which is very little. We have i cat that is very fine. My father has bought a horse which is beautiful. Your friend who has bought this house, is in (the) town. The woman who has made this coat, is very diligent. The child that has lost his penknife, is yery sad. -Where is the man whom I have seen at the house of thy father ? The man with whom (at whose house) we have dined, is departed. Hast thou found the man for whom I have bought this watch ? Have you found the man to whom you have lent your watch ? Have you seen the umbrella which my mother has bought? Hast thou found the pear which thy brother has lost? We have seen the horse which your uncle has sold. Where is the thimble which you have found ? I have taken the pencil which my cousin has bought. Henry has eaten the apple which his brother has received. Have you seen the woman of whom we speak? Have you read the letter which I have written ? Have you found the boy to whom this penknife belongs ? Where is the pen with which you have written this letter? The man with whom you have (finb) arrived, is departed. Your brother is the most diligent man that I have ever seen. The highest house that is in this city, belongs to my father. 47. CORRELATIVES. Masc* Fern. Neuter (I) ■ Neuter (2) ■ berjenige, ber (toeldjer) ber, toeldjer (ber) biejentge, tie (rneldje) bie, toetcfye (bie) ba§jemc;e, ba% (tuetdjeS) ba§, toetcfje^ (ba%) baSjenige, toa$ teas he who she who that which the one that that which (what). — 27 — £)erjenige, ben, the one whom (which); berjenige (ber), nut bem, the one with whom; ber (bit, ba§) meine& SBruberS, that (the one) of my brother. Obs. — (1) The English that which, if it may be replaced by the one that, must be rendered by the masculine berjenige, ber etc., if it refers to things masculine in German. Keferring to things feminine, it must be translated by the feminine biejemge, bte etc.: that (the letter) which we have written, berje- nige (berSBrief), bt\\ ratr gefefyrteben fyaben. — (2) The second form of the neuter (baSjenige, tt)a$; ba$, tt)a§; or nm§ alone) is used, if the English that which may be leplaced by what, and not by the one that, so that it refers to things "in general": That which (what) you have said, is true, ba§, tt>a$ (baSjetltge, ttm§ or tt>a$ alone) @ie gefagt fyaben, ift tt>al)r. 3>rjenige (ber), toeld)er (ber) jufricben ift, ift reid). liefer gin* gerfyut ift beffer aU ber meiner Sdjwefter. £iefe Utjr ift Hcincr ate bie beineS ©rubers. £>iefe$ §>au3 ift fdjoner ate ba$ unferS $lady barg. ^d) fyabe tneinen fmt Derforen imb ben tneineS Setters. SSir Ijaben beine geber gefunben unb bie beineS greunbeS. £)einrid) fyat ineitt ^tmmer "SHcfjcn unb ba$ meineS Dnfete. §aft bit meinen ©tod genommen ober ben meineS 33ruber3 ? £)a£ ift nid)t beine ©fame, ba$ ift bie meiner SDiutter. £aben ©ie mein 2fteffer ober ba$ be$ ®artncr« ? ©predjen ©ie Don meinem Sotjne ober Don bent be$ 2lr jteS ? £)a$ *Pf erb, tt)e(d)e3 foir gefauft fyaben, ift jitnger, ate ba$ 3f)re$ SBaterS. 2JJeine 9Kutter ift nidjt biejemge, bie biefen £mt gefauft fjat. £>iefer 53rief ift nid)t ber, ben id) gefdjrieben Ijabe. £>iefe Uljr ift bie, totldjt id) gefunben Ijabe. 95?ae id) geiefen Ijabe, ift fefjr traurig. 3Der, mit bent id) ge[prod)eu fyabe, ift mem greunb. ©aS, tpaS bu meinem S3ater Derfprodjen fyaft, ift nod) nidjt ange= fommen. £)tefe3 r ift nidjt beffer ate bie, toeldje id) beiner @d)tt)efter getiefjen l)abe. 48. He who is rich, is not always contented. Are you (a woman) the one that has taken this umbrella ? She who has written this letter, is not in this town. My brother is not the one to whom this watch belongs. That horse is not that which we have bought. This pencil is not that which I have found. This table is the one which your joiner has made. This flower — 28 is that which your sister has sent. This steel is harder than that which your father has sent. That which you have written, is sad. What your father has sent is here. That which we have read of your brother is very sad. The room of my neighbor is larger and higher than that of my friend. This umbrella is finer than that which we have bought. Have you taken my pen or that of my sister? This is not your pencil; it is that of my brother. I speak of my book and of that of your friend. Louisa has lost her thimble and that of her mother. Thou hast eaten my apple and that of my cousin. My watch is better than that of my cousin (fern.). I have received your letter and that of your brother. He whom you have sent, has shown this letter to my father. My son is not the one for whom you have made that coat. This man is the one of whom we have spoken. This steel is harder than that of thy friend. 49. JVbwi. £emrtdj, Henry , Siltfe, Louisa; 2)eutfd)(cmb, Germany; Gen. $einridj* { Henry'?f Stti f en * j LouTsa'sT ?CTtW«K ?* Germany; Dot. §etnrtd), to Henry; £uijett f to Louisa; 2)eutfd)fanb, to Germany; Ace. §einrtd), Henry; £uife or guifen, Louisa; 2)eutfd)Ianb, Germany. igtyamen, Spain; Statien, Italy; ^reufcen, Prussia; Sftllftlcmb, Russia; SBten, Vienna; Wofyttt, lives; 29te 6eiJ3t betrt ^Setter ? what is your cousin's name ? what is your cousin called ? 3>er §ut §etnrid)3 or £einridj3 §ut, the hat of Henry, Henry's hat. gBtQelm, William; 3ol)ann, John; (fttttlie, Emily; Sofyanne, Jane; grantmd), France; gel}t f goes; $oIlt, Cologne; 23uiffe(, Brussels; Styon, Lyons; §auptftabt, capital ; $cufer, emperor ; Ijeiftt, is called. Obs. — (1) Proper names of all descriptions take §, never e$, in the geni- tive; those of females in c take n§. — The dative of proper names never takes e, but is generally like the nominative; those of females in t take tt. (2) Proper names may be declined with the definite article, especially in the dative without a preceding preposition (bent §etnrid), to Henry). If so declined they do not take any ending (be§ §ehmd) f fcer Sllife). (3) Instead of the genitive of proper names denoting places, the prepo- sition uon with the dative is more frequent: ber $5nig toon ^reufjen, the king of Prussia (rarely: ber &omg ^veufcenS). — 29 — (4) The English preposition to or for before names of places if depending on verbs of motion, is translated by nad) with the dative. At before names of places is translated by in with the dative. — Names of countries and cities are of neuter gender. 3D?ettt ^Bruber f)eij3t £)ehtrid) nub ntetne Scfytoefter I)etjH Suife. £>er 25ater SBtffyelntS ift angefommen. SMc 2Rutter guiferiS ift abcje* frlft gubtmcjS Dnfrf ift fef)r rettf). SmittenS §ut ift fef)r fdjon. £aben ©te biefen §unb Don §einrtd) ober Don gerbinanb erljalten? Slmatic f)at bent ^ofjann ifjre geber geUefjen. £arf t)at ber gmttie eine 23tume gegeben. ©efyort biefcr ©artctt bcm Subnng ober ber Caroline? 23o ift 933ilt)elm? Gr ift ntit £art nnb 3f>KplJ wtfjjc* gaugen. SSotjnt 3f)r Cnfel in 55ruffcl ober in ^arfe? ©ef}t $*)* Setter nad) 95Meu ober nad) Berlin? -3ft ^ari^ grower ate 8t}on? 3ft $f)r Svennb Don Sofa ober Don Berlin ? SBic fjeiflt bein dlafy bar? Sr Ijeijst ©ampfon. 2Sie Ijeifct bie §auptftabt Don granf* retd)? 2&cr ift.Sonig Don ^reufcen? 2Sie fjcipt bie Sonigin Don Snglanb? Berlin ift bie grofcte ©tabt (city) Don ©eittfcfyfafib. ^Petersburg ift bie §auptftabt be3 SaiferS Don SRujtfanb. 3>r Sonig Don ©panien ift ein @of)it SSictor Smanuefe. §aft bit Smitten meine Ut)r getiefyen ? Q&) {jabe eine S5(umc Don Slmaticn crfyaltett, 50. My cousin's name is John. The daughter of our gardener (fern. ) is called Jane. Art thou Charles's or Ferdinand's brother? Where are Henry and Lewis ? They are in John's room; they are gone out with William. Have you lent your pen to Henry? Who has given this flower to Louisa? We have received a letter of Lewis; he is at Cologne. The sister of Charles is very small. Caroline's hat is too large. My uncle lives in Vienna, and my cousin John in Paris. My friend Reiley goes to Berlin; his brother William is arrived from Holmdel. Have you seen John and Jane ? My garden is larger than that of Emily. Louisa has (ift) gone out with Jane. Henry has (ift) departed for Brussels with his friend Joseph. What is your son's name ? What is the capital of Italy called? Who is the king of Spain? Victor Emanuel is the father of the king of Spain. PART II. 51. Plural. Norn, bte Xtfd)e, the tables; Gen. ber %i\d}t, of the tables; Dai. ben %\\ d)en, to the tables; Ace. bte £ifcl)e, the tables. Nom. %\t ©tabt ^Berlin (not Don Berlin or SBedtnS), the city of Berlin; Gen. ber @tabt ^Berlin, of the city of Berlin etc. Obs. — Most of the nouns that form their genitive in e§, and many fem- inine nouns of one syllable, take the ending e for the plural. The radical vowels a, 0, U and au of such nouns are changed in the plural into d, o, it, (ilU The dative plural of all words ends in it. SDte grennbe nteineS SSater^ finb angefommen. £>ie ©oftne unferS 9?ad)bar3 finb fetjr ffetfjifl. fsi'e @titl)(e, toeldje toxx gefauft tyabett, finb fel)t fdjon. £>abeu @ie bie @tabte ©ten nnb Berlin gefefyen ? tart t)at bte §iite 3SUI)eim$ nnb gcrbinanbs gefunben. 2ftein SSater I)at bie 33riefe ^fyreS ©nfetS nid)t erf>alten. SDie ^ferbe finb n% liefer alS bie Apunbe. 3Me SJJdgbe eureS 9?ad)bar$ finb fefjr fletftig. £)ie 2lerjte in bicfer @tabt finb fefyr reid). 9Bem fyaben Sie bie ©tocfe nteineS 33ruber8 gegeben? £)ie £>auptftabie ber $omge t>on @ad)fen (Saxony) nnb 33atern (Bavaria) finb fefyr fcfyon. liefer ©artcn geljbrt ben ©otjnen meineS 9?ad)bar3. 52. Thy brother has bought the dogs of my neighbor. The friends of Charles are ill. Have you seen the horses of our uncle William ? The cities of Cologne and Strasbourg (@trafc bnrg) belong to the king of Prussia. Where are the hats of my sister Emily ? I have given your umbrella to the maid- servants. Your brother is gone out with the sons of our neighbor (fern.). I speak of Henry's and William's friends. To whom have you sold the trees of my brother ? 31 — 53. 3)er 3aljn, the tooth; ber SKhtg, the ring; ber guj3, the foot; bte ©attS, the goose; bie §atlb, the hand; ber £fyitrm, the tower, steeple; ber (Btfjui), the shoe; roarm, warm; fait, cold; ber ^trumpf, the stocking; toetfc, white. Past Participles : gebrad)t, brought; gemofyrtt, resided; erobert, conquered. Plural (of all genders). Nom. btefe, these; jette, those; roe(d)e, which (what) or who; Gen. biejer^, of these; jetter, of those; It»eld)er, of which (what), of whom; Dat. biefen, to these; jettett, to those; ix?eld)en f to which (what), to whom; Ace. bieje, these; jette, those; ft>eld)e, which (what), whom. Obs. 1. — The plurals of the possessives are nteine, feine, tfyre (her), unfere, eure, irjre (their), 3fyre (your), being for all genders alike. They all are de- clined like the plural btefe. All pronominal adjectives are placed in the plural, if their governing nouns are of this number: her shoes, ifyre ©eld)e @ic gefauft fyaben, the tables which (that) you have bought. Seine S'tifynt ftn& f e *) r toeig. SJieine git^e finb fcljr fait. $(ftt Jpanbe finb ttarnt. $at ber @d)uf)mad)er meiue Sdntfye gebracfjt ? 28er l)at metne ©tritmpfe genommen ? SSo Ijaben Sie biefe ©anfe gefauft? §aben ©te metne 33aume frifjon gefefyen? $on tocldjcn Sdumen fpredjen @ie (do you speak) ? 2?on ben 33aumen, roeldje id) Don bem ©artner ber Honigin gefauft fyabe. Unfcrc ^reunbe finb fd)on abgcreift. SSer Ijat biefe 53ricfe gefdjrieben? 2)Zein 2$ater Ijat feine ^ferbe unb Jpunbe berfauft dJltin dlafybav Ijat 33riefe t)ou feinen Sofynen erfyatten, ttjrfdjc in 33er(in finb. §at ^emanb metne 9ftnge gefunben ? 9liemanb ijat beine Sftnge gefeijen. ftaxt nnrb Don feinen greunben geltebt. 54. Charles and Henry have lost their canes. The shoemaker has not made your shoes. Where have you bought these tables and chairs ? From whom have you received these pen- cils ? My feet arc very small. My sister has lost her thimbles. I have received these letters from my friends. These steeples — 32 — are higher than those. These animals are very fine. These servants are very lazy. Have you already seen our hats and . our rings ? Tour hands are very white. I have found these rings in my uncle's garden. What steeples of Paris have you seen from those mountains ? Of what cities do you speak ? I am speaking of the cities which the khg of Prussia has con- quered in France. My sons to whom you have sold your horses, are departed for Berlin. The cities in which we have resided, are Berlin, Vienna, and Cologne. 55. Sing. Xom. alter, atle, altes, all. Plur. il atie; Gen. alter; Dat. alien; Ace. alte. £>a* &iub, the child; ba§ 3)orf, the village; ba* 23itd), the hook; ba3 iBlatt, the leaf; bae £au*, the house; bas £od), the hole; bae Soft, the people; ba3 £u£)rt, the chicken; bas Q$iaz, the glass; ba3 23t(D, the picture; ba$ 33artb, the ribbon; baz £tefe §Ktufer finb fiotjer ate jenc. Qmt -Scinber finb fdjoner ate btefe. ©cine 33itd)er finb nii&ttc^er ate bte ©iidjcr Suifene. •J)tefe Stutter f)at ifjre & tuber Derloren. £er Sontg f)at feme @df)(dffer derfauft. 2Jon toim ljabett Sie btefe ©tafer ertjatten? SSer Ijat btefe SIcibcr gemadjt? 35tcfer 3Jfann ift fetir alt; er Ijat atle fettte £at)nt ^crloren. 3)iefe 23dCfer finb ntd)t gUicf(td). §einrtd) uttb SStffyefm fyaben afle iljre 33itd)er serloren. Wk eurc ©ricfc finb angefommen. ©er 33ater ift mit alien fetnen Sinbern abgeretft. ©tefc Dorfer finb fef)r fd)dn. Son toctdjen £brfern fpredjeriSie? §abeu Ste ben Sinbern bee 9?ad)barS etnen 2?ogel gegebeu ? SSer ijat afte btefe £od)er in metnen Jifd) gemad)t? * Final % if an ending is added to it, changes into ff, whenever the vowel preceding it is short. — 33 — 56. Where are your children? My children are gone out. Who has bought all these ribbons ? Henrietta has lost all her books. We have seen all your houses. Have you also seen the castles of the king? This tree has lost all its leaves. My neighbor has sold all his chickens. I have found this book in all countries and cities which I have seen. Charles has written letters to all his friends. I have the pictures of all my children. The men who have dined with your friend, have ({fob) already departed. I have spoken with these men of the books which you have written. 51. SDer ©ttefet, the boot; bie (5>abel, the fork; ber €>pteget, the mirror; ber @d)nabel, the beak; ber Soffel, the spoon; ba3 Sftabdjen, the girl; bte 9laM, the needle, pin; ber Staltatier, the Italian. @te roofyitett, they live; fie cjefybrett, they belong. Obs. — (1) Masculine and neuter nouns in er, el, ert add no endings in nominative, genitive and accusative plural, but those in er and et add. as usual, n in the dative, and some of them, as SBruber, better, ^d)nabef, Boi}e(, ©arteit, 9lpfel, soften their radical vowels. — (2) Feminine nouns in er and et add it in every case of the plural, except bie flitter and bte Xodjter, which take rt in the dative only. ®ie ©cfjnetber nnb Sd)nl)mad)er in bicfer ©tabi finb afte retcf). SMefe (Snglanbcr finb fefyr ffetfctg. SRcfoc ©ruber finb attc Irani. §>aben @ic meine @djt»eftern gefeljen? 2S}o $afcn Ste btefe 86ffef, SBieffer nnb ©abcht gefanft? ©ie genfter gljreS £immtx% finb off en. SStr baben btefe 2?oge( in ben SSafbern gefimben. £>te Jtger finb fefjr ftarf. SDiefe SRabdjen finb feljr gtitcfttd). ©fob meine Xocfjter an&= gegangen? ©fob meine 3immer ntd)t fef)r fd)bn? $at tfjre Xante alle btefe Spiegel gefanft? 23er Ijat bte Stiver nnb ftebern biefeS 2)?abtf)cn3 genommen? Sent gefjoren btefe ©arten nnb §>anfer? 8uife nnb £>enrtette Ijaben ifyre DJabeln fcerforen. ®er ©djnljmadjer bat ^f)re ©djufje nnb ©ttcfelttodj nicfyt gebradjt. $mt 3Eannerfinb -3ta(ianei\ ©iefe ©arten gefjoren metnen iBritbern. Q&) ^abc in biefen 3fotntcrn geroofynt. — 34 — 58, The shoemaker has brought your shoes and boots. The houses of this village are all very fine. Bring us (^3ringen @ie im$) the spoons, forks, and knives. Where have you bought these needles ? Your brothers and sisters are arrived. Our mothers have seen the gardens of the king. My sons have bought the mirrors of my neighbor. Horses are bigger than tigers. These Italians live in the city of Berlin. The beaks of those birds are long. 59. (£tn$ (etn) one; fiinfjeljn, fifteen; pirn, two; fedjjeljn, sixteen; bret, three; ftebgefyn, seventeen; fcter, four; ad)t$ef)n, eighteen; fiinf, five; nettnjeljn, nineteen; fed)3, six; gtuan.stfj, twenty; fteben, seven; bte 2(ufgabe, the lesson, exercise; ad)t, eight; *ba£ 3al)V, the year; ixemt, nine; bte 2Bod)e, the week; geljn, ten; *ber Sftonat, the month (pi. e); elf, eleven; *ber Xag, the day; gtoolf, twelve; bte @tunbe, the hour; bretjelju, thirteen; ber $naht, the hoy; irieqefyn, fourteen; fett, since, ago (governs the dative). Obs. — (1) Substantives of whatever gender, ending in e, (except a few neuters) take n in all cases of the plural, and never soften their radical vowels. — (2) The English there is is rendered by e$ ift, said there are by e$ fmb, if there has no local meaning, and is merely expletive. If e3 ift, e$ ftltbf do not begin the sentence and are preceded by words other than conjunctions, the pronoun e3 is omitted. — (3) The form eht$ (one) is only used in numeration, or when one refers to a neuter noun mentioned before. Else it takes the form etn, ettte, ettt, and is declined exactly like the indefinite article. 3n unfcrm §au[e finb toiergeljrt dimmer. $n btefem dimmer finb gtt>ct Xi\d)t imb jwolf @titf)(e. Unfer 9iad)bar l)at fiinf $tnber: bret @6^ne imb gti>et iocfyter. 2Btr fjaben t>ier katyn unb bret £mnbe. Qn eurem ©arten finb fimfjetjn 33cwme. £)a$ Qafyx f)iti gtuotf donate; bcr 2ftortat fyat iner SSodjen; bte SBodje fjat fieben Sage. Qd) fyabe t)on metnem SSater ferf)^ Slepfelf unb ad)t 33inten * Masculine and neuter nouns, not ending in e, which do not soften the radical vowel, are marked with an asterisk. f If the softened vowel is a capital, the softening is generally indicated by an e, added to it. — 35 — crijatten. 9)tan Onfel Ijat metner Sd)tt>efter eitt gebermefjer unb jwaujig gfcbent gegeben. §>a[t bufdjon alle betne 9Iuf gaben gemadjt? ^ofyamt f)at nod) ntd)t feme Slufgaben gemadjt. §aben 2ie nod) nid)t gefpeift ? Qd) fyabe [fdjon] fcit bret Stunben gefpeift. 3 ft Qi)v 23ater nod) nid)t angefommen? Sr ift [fc^onj fett jroet £agen ange* lommen. 2fteitt Dnlcl Ijat fett ad)t £agen nidjt£ gegeffen. SReut ©ruber ift neim Qatyt alt, aber tnetne Sdjroefter ift nod) nidjt fieben ^afyre aft. 60. My father has three houses and two gardens. This man has five boys and four daughters. My friend has seven sisters. We have received six letters. In this town there are twenty shoe- makers. My cousins (fern.) have bought two cats. My cousin is seventeen years and two months old. My mother has bought six knives, twelve forks, and eighteen spoons. Our joiner has made three tables and ten chairs. We have received this week fifteen chickens and three calves. William has eaten five apples and four pears. Henry arrived (is arrived) three days ago. My uncle departed (is departed) a year ago. Charles and Ferdinand have made six exercises. There are two holes in this door. In this town there is one physician. The gardener has given three flowers to my children. I have seen one of your sisters. This house belongs to one of my friends. 61. 23rot, bread, some bread, any bread; g(etfd), meat, some meat, any meat; $(epfel, apples, some apples, any apples. bte &trfd)e, the cherry; tie ^Pflaume, the plum; bie £tnte, the ink; bte Suppe, the soup; man firtbet, one rinds, they find; getrunfen, drunk (participle); er madjt, he makes; do you want ? gefatltgft, if you please. *£)a§ 23rot, the bread ba§ gletfrf), the meat; bte 2Iepfel, the apples; 'S)cr 2£eht, the wine; bae Sier, the beer; *ba% ©affer, the water; ba$ @emiije, the vegetables; bet* 3 u # er ' tne sugar; ber £affee, the coffee; qebett @ic ntiv, give me; rooften §>ie? will you [have], Qd) Ijabe ©rot unb g&ifdj gegeffen. 23tr fjaben Strjdjen unb ^flaumen gefauft. 3Kein ©ruber ijat ffiein getrunfen nub ifjr ijabt ©ier unb Saffer getrunfen. ©er @djuf)mad)er madjt ®fydp unb — 36 — ©ttefef. £)cr £tfd)ter marf)t Stifle unb @tiif)(e. 2Kan finbet bet biefcm S'aufmamt 33ud)er, gebern, £inte unb 23(ei[ttfte. ©ebenSie mtr Suppe unb ©emiife. £ner ift SBein wnb SCBaffcr, unb ba ift $affee unb 2Rild). $aben ©ie aud) 3uder? SBk *) aben 3K^ffer unb ©abeln, Xaffen unb ©lafcr gefauft. £)er ©artner t)at Cmfen Striken unb 53tumen gegeben. £>aben @tc fdjon Saffee getrunfen? 2ftcm finbet in jenem £wuje Spiegel, 9?egenfd)trme, 33anber, gingerfyiite unb -Wabetit. 2Kcinc greunbin l)at Don ifyrem Onfel 53irnen unb ^flaumen erfjatteu. SEir fjabett gift&en, £iger, $a£ett unb §unbe gefeljen. Qn biefer @tabt finb ©cfynetber unb @d)u()mad)er, toeldje fel)r reidj finb. SDBoIten @ie@uppe ober ©emiife? ©eben ©ie mir gefciUigft gleifdj unb $rot; 62. Will you [have] some wine or some beer, some milk or some water? Give me, if you please, some soup, vegetables, meat, and bread. Where does one find (finds one) ink and pens ? Have you children ? Has your father bought trees or flowers ? My brother has books and friends. Here is coffee and sugar. My neigbor has birds , dogs, and horses. We are speaking of towns and villages, of houses and gardens. What have you done? We have done our lessons; we have written letters. We have eaten apples -and plums, and we have drunk some wine and beer. Do you want these spoons or those ? Have you sold any wine to my brothers? Have you bought any cherries of my brothers? 63. ffienig, little, few; ba% Db% bte gntd)t, the fruit; Dte(, much; Side, many; ba§ ©etb, the money; genug, enough; ber^pfefjer, the pepper; mel)r, more; ba$ @al$, the salt; roemger, less, fewer; ber @ertf, the mustard; rote? how? ber 9ftenjd), man (pi. bie 3ftertfd)ert). Obs. — (1) There is and there are are often translated by e§ gtbt (literally: it gives), instead of e§ ift and e3 finb, both for singular and plural nouns. Both expressions differ only slightly. The noun, following e§ gjbt, is placed in the accusative, and the pronoun e§ in this connection can never be omit- ted. — (2) 2Bemg, tuentger, t)id may be left undeclined in most instances; — 37 — but mel)r is never declined. — (3) The English man is rendered either SRdtttt or 2ftenfd). The word JiQfatlU is confined to the adult male sex, while SReitfd] means a human being in general. £>einrid) fyat Diet ©efb; ft fyat mefyr ©elb ate id). ©ebcn 2ie mir cm rcentg tfleifd). 3^ ^) abe 9 enu 9 ^ rot - £ u l*ft 3 U stel Sal} unb ^feffcr. SSir ljabeu roemger Cbft ate ifyr. 8uife f)at roeniger gebern ate §enriette. Sari t»at mefyr Slufgaben gemad)t ate gubtirig. ©aft bu fo diet ©elb ate mem ©ruber ? fis gtbt menig 2Kenfd)en, uoeldje jufriebeu finb. ©cben Sie ^enrtetten nidjt ju met Senf! SReut ©ruber fjat $u met SBein getnmfen. SMefer SWann l)at t»tefe ©lumen. Ste oiete $unbe f)at 3^r SBqter? @3 gtbt btefeS 3 af ) r ttjenig &irfd)en, aber triel ^flaumen. 9Retn greunb t)at biefe 3Sod)e metjr ©riefe erljatten ale id). §>at bein ©ater fo mete ©ticker aI-3 memCnfet? ©eben Ste mir gefaUtgft ein toentg Jinte. SSolten Sie nod) (any) mef)r? 3d) I) a ^ genug. ©tbt e3 nid)ttnet ©emitfe in btefem Sanbe ? 6-4. There is much fruit this rear. Our gardener has many trees and flowers. Will you have a little meat or some vegetables? Have you mustard enough? I have salt and pepper enough. Our neighbor has much money; he is very rich. Give a littlef wine to this woman. This man has few friends, but he has many dogs and cats. There are many birds in this forest. How many physicians are there in your town? Have you as many apples and pears as we ? We have not so many as you, but we have more plums and cherries than you. Charles has fewer friends than Henry. This tree has fewer leaves than that one. There are (finb) too many chairs in this room. Is (gibt) there more than one physician in this town? How few men are there that are contented ! 65. £)a§ Stiicf, the piece; *ba§ Sufcenb, the dozen: tie gtafdje, the bottle; ber &orb, the basket; Me £affe, the cup; bie getnroattb, the linen; f Little is translated by ffettt, if it is opposed to great or targe; but by ooentcj, if opposed to much. — 38 — *ba3 ^pfunb, the pound; ba$ £afct)etttud),the pocket-handkerchief; bie enrtette bret $aar ^anbfdjulje, fed)3 ^aar ©tritmpfe, gttjct ©u^enb §emben unb emeu §toxb Sirfcfyen ge= fcfyitft. On bicfcm goffer fmb jefyn (Stfen 8etm»cmb, mer Stamen* iiicfyer unb fed)3 §a(3binben- S0ieitt 35ruber l)at jmet ^aar <3d)ufye unb em ^Saar ©tiefel gefauft. Sir I)aben bent greunbe unferS ©nfete groanjtg ^funb gudtv unb geljn gfafcfyen SSBeiu gefdjicft. ®tbtn ©ie mir em ©titcf Safe, eine gtafdje 33ier unb etn toentg @enf. 3d) fyabe em ®(a$ SBetn getrunfen unb etn @tiuf @d)infen gegeffen. 93?ir fyaben bet unferer greunbin etne £affe Saffee getrunfen. ©eben @ic mir etn @(a$ SSaffer unb etn ©tiicf ^ucfer. 9Mctnc ©djtoefter l)at gwet ^Jfunb Sirfdjen unb etn s $funb ^flaumen gefauft. SBtr I)aben etn £)u£enb ©tittle bet bem Stiller unferS Dnfete gefauft. ■3?d) l)abe Don bem ©artner einen Sorb SMumen erijatten. £)iefe$ §au$ ift gnjanjig gup fjod). 66. The shoemaker has made a pair of shoes for Louisa and two pair of boots for William. We have drunk two glasses of wine and three glasses of beer. Give me a bottle of water and a little meat and bread. Will you have a piece of ham or cheese ? My aunt has bought a dozen of cravats, two dozen of shirts, and ten pair of gloves and stockings. How many shirts have you? 1 have three dozen. This linen is very fine; how many yards have you bought ? I have bought twenty yards. That (ba$) is not enough for ten shirts. My uncle has given to Henry a penknife, twenty pens, two cravats, and a pair of gloves. Ferdinand has bought a pound of plums, six ounces of coffee, and two yards of ribbon. Will you have a cup of — 39 — coffee or a glass of wine ? Give me, if you please, a glass of water. My brother is six feet three inches high. Scber, jebe f jebe§, every, each; tie &ttge(, the bullet; fdjlcdjt, bad; btc gfteittlbttt, the (female) friend; Ijiibfd), pretty; bet Secret, the teacher; tobt, dead; ber 2£eg, the way, the road; beriiljmt, renowned; ber C£ng timber, the Englishman; roetie, wise; bets Sebeit f the life; gotben, golden, gold (adj.); *ba3 3d)tcfiai, the fate; ft [bent, silver (adj.); ba§ 3ftctbd)en, the girl; ttttg, short, brief; bag tft, that is. Obs. 1. — Predicative . adjectives take no endings of declension: ber ffllamx tft gut 2. Adjectives not predicative (that is connected with a noun expressed or understood) must take certain endings of declension either according to the weak or according to the strong scheme of declension. 3„ The strong scheme of declension is the one by which the definite ar- ticle and the determinatives (btefer, jener, jeber, roe(d)er) are declined. It consists of the endings cr, t, ee, em, en. 4. The weak scheme consists of the endings e and en only: e for the nominative sing, of all genders and the accusative sing, feminine and neuter; ert for all the other cases. 5. The weak declension is used whenever any adjective is preceded by the definite article, or by a determinative (btefer, etc.). Nam. Sing, ber (btefer) gute 3ftamt; ba$ (btefes) gute $htb; Gen. '• be§ (btefeS) guten 9ftanne$ f etc. Nom. riur. bie guten banner, etc. QzbtZ SqclM fyat cut 3)ad). Sfebe Snget madjt em 8odj. Sr fyat |eben greunb bcrforen. Qn jeber ©tabt gibt e3 eirtett Weft. [5Dcr] gute f)einrid) ift frank [2>te] Heine Sopljie tft fefjr fyiibfcf). «Da3 arate £tnb t)at fetne 2Rutter fcerforen. ©a3 tft ber f)otf)fte S8anm in unferm ©arten. gijette tft bie ffeipgfte tjonf urtfent SDftigben. ©ie* fer reidje Gnglanber 'xoofynt bet meinem Cnfef. SBo Ijaben Ste btefe golbene Sftabel gefunben? 2Sem gefyort btefeS gro£e £)au3 unb jener fdjotte ©arten? Jpctnrtd) tft ntit [bent] fleinen Sari cmSgegattgett. SSir t>aben geftern bet ber gtttcn (Smtlte Sirfdjen gegeffen. SBer mol)nt in biefent fd)bnen Sdjfoffe? 2Bie Ijet^t btefe fcfydne 33(ume? f Of after superlatives may be expressed by the genitive or the preposi- tion t?on. — 40 — 2Bo fjaben @ie biefett fdjtedjteu 3S3em unb biefed fd)(edjte 23rot gefauft? £)er ^ome unb bcv £iger finb bie ftarfften £f)tere. £)a3 finb bie gtiid;* ltdjften £age metneS gdben& ©eben @ie bicfem armen SJiaune cut toenig Sera! £)er SSater biefeS Keinen 3Kabd)cn* ift tobt. £)a3 ift i>a$ ©cfytcffat jebe$ graven 2Kanne3. ©tc fdjbneu X)orfer jeneS £anbe$ finb beriifymt. @r fyat metnem gfretmbe bie beften 3immer in fetnem §aufe gegeben. ©te @of)ne ber weifeftett 3Sater finb oft'bmnm (dull). 68. Not every king is great and wise. Every year has twelve months, and every week seven days. We have seen books and pictures in each room. The diligent scholar is loved by every teacher. The new house of my brother is sold. I have read the long letter of your friend. He has spoken of the sad fate of this young man. The father of (the) little Henry islTead. The daughter of this old woman is sick. Give this flower to my young friend (male and female). Which hat have you taken? I have taken my white hat. Which watch and which ring have you sold ? We have sold the silver watch and the gold ring. The short roads are not always the best * Are there any lions and tigers in the cold countries of the earth ? The dresses of these young girls are too long. The fates of the greatest men are often sad. I have resided in the best houses of the city. 69. $eitt, feine, few, no (adj.); fettt greimb, no friend; these are, ba§ (bte$ finb); the business, ba% ©eftfjaft Obs. 1. — If adjectives are preceded by the nominative sing, or the neuter accusative sing, of em, fetn or of any possessive (mein, bein, unjer, etc.), they are declined after the strong declension, and take the endings of btejet, biefc, btefc$: mein guter $ater, wife* guteS $inb. 2. If adjectives are preceded by any other case of ein, fetn, mein, etc., they are declined after the weak declension; metneS guten Waters, etc. Unfer ©artner ift ein guter 3ftamt. @ure ©artnerin ift erne gute grau. gmtlie iff ein fefyr guteS.Sinb. 2Btr fjaben ctnen guten 93atcr unb cine gute gutter. £etnrtd> jfjat ein fcfjtfueS ^fcrb unb etneu * Adjectives whose nouns are understood, must be translated as if the nouns were expressed. — 41 — ftfjonert §tmb. Sutfe fyat gro^e 3cxtib itnb etnen ffehteu gu£. gerbmanb ift mit meinem iimgereu -©ruber au£ge* gaugen. §)enriette ift mit uteiuer dttcren ®d)tr>efter abgereift. ®cben @te Mc|e^ 23rot eiuem armeu Siube! S^iefe^ gebermefier geljbrt eiuem iungett Sftauue, ber bet unfcrm 9?ad)bar nootjut. Subung ift ber ©oljn eitteS reidjeu kaufmamtS. ©tr fyabeu feinen guteu Scut unb fern gute* ©rot. SJBcr ljat tueiue fUbewe Ufyr unb meiueu gotbeueu 9?iug geuommen ? 2§3tr fyabeu unfent beftcn ^reunb tterloreu. Sure fteiueu $tuber finb fefyr gut. S* gibt btefeS Qafyv feme guteu Sir* fdjen. 9)tou Cnfel l)at feiue fdjbnjten ^ferbe uerfauft. -831ft bu mit beiueu ueuen ©tiefetu jufriebeu? §aft bu fdjott. turn unfern guteu ^ffaumeu gegeffeu ? Q&) §abt eiu befjere* |jferb unb eineu grb^ereu §uub, a(* ©ie. Sari ift eiu f)itbfd)erer £uabe ate £einridj. TO. Charles is a good boy. Emily is a pretty girl. That is a happy mother. That is a very good wine. Where is my little Henry, my good Louisa? We have a very rich uncle. William has an old father. Iron is a useful metal. The dog is a faith- ful animal. I have received a new umbrella and a gold watch. My neighbor has done much business (plural in German) this year. Give this bottle of wine to a poor man or to a poor woman. I have no friend in this town. Have you no good pens for this child ? Our best friends are dead. This joiner makes no good chairs. These are the tables and books of our youngest children. A horse is a more useful animal than a dog. ' Thou hast written a longer letter than I. 71. $ortreffft(f), excellent; ber gtetg, the diligence; tott), red; bte Statue, the statue; ItebettSumrbtg, amiable; ba§ 2}evgniigen, the pleasure; ber SDfairmor, the marble; ba§ papier, the paper; bte ©efafyr, the danger; gerettet (past part.), saved. Obs. — If the adjective is not preceded by an article or any other deter- minative word, it is inflected after the strong declension. £>ier ift guter (gcfyinfen, gute Suppe unh gute* ©rob. £>abett @ie gute* papier uub gute £iute ? Sir jjabert fdjfedjtett SBein unb Bute* SBaffer getruttfeu. Uufer ©artuer tjat t>ortreffad)e$ ©6ft. — 42 — Unfere Wla$ I)at guten ©enf, aber ftftfedjten *pfeffer gefauft (gbuarb Ijat gutc grambe unb nitfcfidje 4Biirf)cv. 9fteht Dnfel fjat fcfybnc ©ar* ten unb grope ^pciufer* ©iter Sfauffbar l)at treue £>unbe. 3ol)amt, gebeu @ie mir em ©ta3 SBaffer ! 2S}oflen @ie !a(te« ober toarmes SBaffer ? 9tteinc @d)tt)efter f)at em ^aar pbfdje £anbfd)uf)e gefauft $ari$ unb Sonbon finb fdjone ©tabte. ^einrid) l)at em ^5aar neue ©djulje erfyatten. IHebe ©djroefter ! $d) fyabe betnen 23rief mtt gro^em 23ergniigen gelefen. $ar( f)at feme Slufgabe mtt rotter £inte ge* fcfjriebert. Have you any good mustard ? We have good bread and good meat. Your gardener has very fine flowers. These children have fine dresses. We have faithful friends, amiable brothers, and useful books. Give me some better cheese and better bread. At (bei) this merchant's one finds pretty gloves, fine penknives, and good pens. Iron and silver are very use- ful metals. You have always excellent wine. My brother is not gone out, he has too much business (plur. ). Henry has bought good paper and good ink. We speak of good coffeo, of excellent fruit, and new dresses. You have done your lesson with great diligence. Poor friend, how little money have you made ! This statue is made of white marble. He has saved the life of his friend with great danger. 73. 2)er, bte, ba% erfte, the first; ber, bie, ba$ te^te, the last; ber, bie, ba& jtuette, the second; unarttg, naughty; ber, bie, bctS britte, the third; ber £l)eif, the part; ber, i>k f ba§ merte, the fourth; ber 23anb, the volume; ber, bie, ba$ attmrtjtgfte, the twentieth; nur, only; bie Piaffe, the class. 3)er nneinetfte ? what day of the month ? what (in order) ? * ber erfte Sanuar, the first of January; ber Sftonat 9#at, the month of May. Obs.— (1) The ordinals from 2 to 20 add te to the cardinals; from twenty upwards they add fte. They decline weak, if preceded by the definite article- (2) Names of the months and the days of the week are masculine. * If an ordinal numeral is expected in the answer. — 43 — £)er Junge 2ttatm ift fcljr flei^ig; er ift ber erftc in ber £faffe. Sad ift ber jroeite; §einrid) tft ber brttte; ^ofyann ift ber Dterte; [ber] f(eine SBiltjctm ift ber fiinfte; ^au( ift ber fed)ete ; granj (Francis) ift ber adjte; ©uftat) ift ber neunte; [ber]unartige Sbuarb ift ber elfte imb [ber] f aufc Subtmg ber fefete. £\vti ift ber fiinfte X^eit t)on gefyit. giinf ift ber diertc £f)eit Don Jtuanjig. gin £ag ift ber fiebente £f)ett einer SSodje. ©en nnetuelfteu fyaben mir (is it) fyente? SBir l)aben ijeute ben breijefynteu ober ben dierjefynten. 3ft e$ nidjt ber gtoattjtgfte ? SDZetit SBatcr ift bm britten 9ftat abgereift, nnb ben jeljtu ten December angefotnmett. §aben Sie ben erften nnb jtneiten 33anb ? Qti) Ijabe nnr im erften. W. Louisa is the first in the class; Pauline is the second; (the) little Josephine is the third; Emily is the fifth; (the) pretty Sophy (Sopl)ie) is the ninth; Jane is the fifteenth; (the) naughty Caro- line is the last. Three is the sixth part of eighteen. A week is the fourth part of a month; and a month is the twelfth part of a year. What day of the month is it (have we) ? It is to- day the eleventh or the twelfth. We (are) departed on the second of May and arrived on the sixteenth. Which volume have you taken ? Have you taken the third and the fourth ? I have only taken the third. 15. 2>er, (bie, ba§) meine, j ber etc. betne, ) ber, (btc f bae) meinige, >■ mine; ber etc. betntge, >■ thine; meiner, meine, meineS, ) beiner, e, e$, J ber feine, etc., his; ber ifyre, etc., hers; ber unfere, unfrtge, etc., ours; ber cure, etc., (3()re, Sfyrige"), yours; ber ifyre, etc., theirs. @d)tt>er, difficult (hard), heavy; Ietd)t, easy (not difficult), light (not heavy); ber (ba8) £ot}n (sing.), the wages (plur.). Obs. — (1) Mine, thine, etc., if used predicatively (after bin, btft, ift, ftnb) are rendered by mettt, betrt, etc., without article and ending: !^a$ §au3 ift metn, bie §au[er ftnb mein, the house is mine, the houses are mine. — (2) £)er meine, meinige; ber betne, etc., are used, if a noun, previously men- tioned is understood: 3)eut §au$ ift grbfter, ate ba3 meine (meinige) or ate metncu. These expressions are also used predicatively, but with peculiar ■— 44 — meanings (which may be orally indicated by the teacher). — (3) 2>er tnehte, ber metmge, etc. decline weak: Gen. be§ metnen (meinigen); Plur. bie metnen (mettugen), etc. Reiner, betner, etc., decline strong: Gen. metneS; Dot. meinem; Plur. meiue. SDiefeS 33ud) i[t mem. £)iefe gebern finb nidjt bein* £>iefe Uf)r ift itttfer. Dein $ater ift grower aid ber metnigc. 9Kcinc 2Jhrtter ift fletner aid bie betne. Unfcr -Sud) iff nut|ltd)er aid bad 3>ljrigc. 2Kein ©b^it ift nid)t fo alt aid ber beinige. ©uer ^ferb ift junger aid bad imfere. Unfere ifiiidjer finb nii^lidjer aid bie eurigen. DJJein SSater l)at feme Uljr uertoren; ^einrid) fjat and) bie feinige Derloren. 3Keine ©dwefter Ijat bie Hjre berfauft 9Kein SSater tjat beinen 33rief unb ben metnen gelefen. SJJJcinc Xante Jot iljren ©arten unb ben unfrigen fcerfanft §at bein 55ruber nteinen ©tod ober feinen genommen? $at &iife metnen gingerljnt ober iljren gefnnben? £)etne 2lufgaben finb leister aid bie meinigen. SDtefe 33aume finb l)6l)er aid bie unferen. $n unferer ©tab! finb meljr 3lerjte aid in eurer. £arld 23ifb ift gut; aber beined (beind) ift Dortreffttd). 2Hein 33ruber ift grower, aid beiner. Unfere Slufgabe ift fd)tt>erer aid eure. (§r t)at meinem SJruber meljr 5lepfel gegeben, aid beinem. 23ir geben unferer SDiagb fyofjeren 8W}tt, aid ifyr ber eurigen. ii This basket is mine; these gloves are ours. The city is ours. My thimble is as fine as yours. Your umbrella is not so large as mine. My son is more diligent than thine. My Mend has sold his house and mine. My sister has eaten her apple and thine. Has Louisa taken my pen or hers; my pencil or hers ? Henry has read nfy books and yours. Your sisters are younger than ours. We speak of our friend and of yours. Is my room smaller than thine? I have promised a book to your son and to mine, to your daughter and to mine. I speak of my tasks and of thine. This castle belongs to my uncle and to yours. What wages are higher, yours or mine ? Are your last lessons harder or easier than ours? Are thy bullets heavier or lighter than his ? Emily's room is prettier than mine, but mine is larger than hers. Are the wages of the Englishman higher than thine or those of the Italian ? — 45 — 77. Singular. Plural. Norn, er, he; fie,: she; e3, it; fie, they; Ace. it)n, him; fie, her; es, it; fie, them. 3a, yes; neirt, no (answering- particle). For the use of the gender see No. 41. §>aben @ic metuen etod? $a, id) fyabe if)n. §aben @ic meine Uf)i\? Diem, id) qabe fie uid)t. §aben eie meitt 2)ieffer ? Qd) fyabe e£ nid)t. §aben Sie metne ©djjulje ? 3 a / W) J) a ^ e U e - 2$° $ ntein Apuub ? 3d) ^a6c if>it uid)t gefefyen. 2Ser Ijat meine geber genommen ? SDem .©ruber I) at fie genommen. 33o f)aft bu biefe§ Xafdjentud) ge* fimben? 3d) ^ a ^ e c * * n 3^ m 3' mmcr gefnnben. £)iefe 33oge( finb fef)r fd)on. 33on ftem Ijaft bu fie erfyatten ? Seine Sdjtoefter ift fefjr fleigig; meine gutter tiebt fie feljr. §aben 2ie meinen Ctjetm gefannt? 3d) fyabe ifjn nid)t gefannt. SDteS ift eiunit£tid)e3 23ud); l)abcn Sie e3 fd)on gefefen? 23?o ift mein tfiugerfyut? Qd) fyabeifnt 3')^* Sdjmcfter gegeben; fie I)at il)tt oerforen. iptit ^emanb meine &abd genommen? £ar( l)at fie genommen. 2Bem fjat ber ©artner alle biefe 33fumcu gefebieft? <5r f)at fie efter gefauft? 9icitt, id) fjabe feiue Ufyr fitr fie gefauft. Has the tailor brought my coat ? Yes, he has brought it. Hast thou already done thy lesson ? I have not yet done it. Have you seen my new room? No, I have not yet seen it. Where hast thou bought these pretty rings ? I have bought them in Paris. I have received a letter from my aunt, have you read it? Have you already seen the king? I have not yet seen him. You have a good pen; give it to my sister. Where are your gloves ? I have lent them to your aunt. Where is your umbrella ? Give it to this child. My aunt is dead; did you know her? What books have you there? Have you read them? Where is thy dog? My father has sold it. Have you received any letters for your father ? Xo, I have received no letters for him. Have you bought these books for your mother ? No, I have not bought them for her. — 46 — ?9. Perfect Tense: \tf) bin geftefett, I have been; bit bift geraefen, thou hast been; er ift gerueieu, he has been; ttnr finb geroefett, we have been; irjr feib geroefen, you have been; fie finb getoefett, they have been. SDer §err, the gentleman; ber 33?orgert, the morning; ba$ grauletn, the (unmarried) lady; ein rjalber, eine fyalbe, ein IjalbeS, bie 3)ame, the lady (married or half a, one half of; unmarried); triertel, quarter, (one) fourth of; 3itfammeit, together; etumat, once; tjeute, to-day; gruehiiai, twice; gliicfltd), happy, successful; bveimal, three times; lattge (adv. of time), long, a long Btemtai, four times; time; titemal§, nte, never Obs.— (1) The nouns §err, ftxau, grduieiti are used as titles and ad- dresses (Mr., Sir, Madam, Mrs., Miss). Mr. and Sir are translated by §err; Mrs. by grail ; Madam by the French 9Jiabame, if a married lady is addressed. In the address of an unmarried lady grtiuiettl is used. Miss is translated by grtiltlettt. — (2) If §err is used before the names of persons spoken of it is de- clined with or without the article; in the plural the article must always be used, and mostly in the genitive singular. — (3) £err takes in all cases of the singular it, and in all cases of the plural en. — (4) The words §erv, grcut, grduletn are used idiomatically, if relatives or friends of the person addressed are spoken of without mentioning their names: 3l)r §err greunb (your friend); 3br §err 23atev, 23ruber, (Sofyn; 3l)re grau Gutter; 3rjr graulettt ^djroefter. (5) Of after fractions is generally not translated, the following noun, if the numerator of the fraction is more than one, being placed in the plural: bret Dtertel (Sftett (but bret fciertel ^fitttb. See No. 65). 2Ser ift tjter getoefen? £>err Wloli ift fyier gemejett; er I)at biefeS 35nd) gebradjt. 33ift bit bet bent ©d)iti)mad)er gen)efen ? $d) bin l)eute bet ^fyrem @cf)iti)mad)er gercefen; er l)at Qfyve ©tiefcl fdjon ge= madjt So feib ifyr biefen Sttorgen gewefen? 2Btr finb bei imferm grennbe Sari geipefen, tteldjer fef)r Iranf ift £)tefer §err ift bret Qatyxt in SSien gemefen, unb feitte 33ritber finb fel)r fange in $onftan* tinopet gettefen. £)u btftnidjt flet^tg gewefen, bn fyaft beitte SInfgaben nod) nidjt gemad)t. Qd) bin geftern bei gran 9tober geroefen; fie ift eine fefyr lieben&tmrbige £)ame* 3ft granfein (Smilie oft in biefer Stabt geroefen ? ©ic ift fd^ou breimat fjier geroefen. £)aben @tc — 47 — £>errn ©djott gefannt? $d) fyabe ifyn in Berlin gefannt; wit fittb oft juf ammen auSgegangen. 2Bie lange ftnb ©ie in SWabrit) geroefen ? $d) bin nnr em IjalbeS $at)v ^ a geroefen, aber td) bin brei triertet 3al)re in $ari£, unb ein t)ierte( .^afjr m SS3ten geroefen. §aben ©ie bie §>erreu 9JoQct fdjon gefefyen? Qa, 2ftabamc, id) Ijabc fie geftern bet einem meiner grennbe gefdjen. 3ft meine Mutter Ijier getoefen ? 9iem, [mein] grauleht; id) fjabe $f)re S^au Gutter nid)t gefeljen; aber $l)r § err ^ ater uni> 3S r £ err Sntbcr finb biefen 2Korcjen em* ma( fyier geroefen. 80. Has [there] been anybody in my room ? Yes, your son has been there. Has the tailor been here ? No, he has not yet been here. Hast thou been at the joiner's ? No, I have not yet been there. We have many flowers; we have been in the garden of Mr. Nollet. Have you also been at Mr. Moll's? My brother has never been more contented than to-day; he has received from his uncle a beautiful gold watch, and half a dozen pocket-handkerchiefs. How long have you been in Paris? We have been there six months. These gentlemen have done much business (plur.); they have been very success- ful. Are Messrs. N. already departed for Cologne ? They are departed this morning with their uncle; I have seen them at Mrs. Sicard's. Has Miss Louisa been here to-day? No, Madam, your sister has not been here; I have seen her three quarters of an hour ago at your brother's [house]. Give me half a yard of (Don) this linen. Have you ever known my father? Yes, I have seen him three or four times at your sister's. 81. Imperfect Tense: id) tt> at, I was; bit tear ft, thou wast; er Wax, he was; tinr tuaren, we were; tin* maret, you were; fie toaren, they were. Cremate, formerly; bie (Sd)ute, the school; aU, when. Obs. — When a clause begins with al§, when, the verb is placed at the end of xhe clause. — 48 — 2Bo toarft bn btefen SJiorgen? Qd) mar bet nteinem Setter, wtldjcx Don granffurt angefommen iff. SUZctn '53ruber unb id) toaren bet bet* item $ater. Qfyxt Xante hoar fdjon abgereift. £>err 2)iott mar ef)e* mats feljr retcf) ; er Ijat feit jefjn ^atjren bict fcertorcn. SBarctt @te nod) md)t bet £)errn tyflabit) ? Qd) bin geftent ba gcroefen, aber er roar auSgegangeu. 2Bte a(t mar 3f)r Sperr SBxubtv, ate er tit ftStit mar? @r mar nemtjdjn ober gmattgig Qcfytt aft. Sir maren ntdjt gufammen; er mar in $oln unb id) mar in £>it(fetborf. 3Kcinc ©(^meftern maren tange in IBrftffel bet £>emt Collet. SSantm ftnb @te geftern ntdjt gefommen ? 3djj mar geftent fran!. SBaren biefe §erren tmnter fo retd)? £>aben @te tmmer fo tnefe greunbe gefjabt? JBarft bu btefen 2ttorgen in [berj ©djute? $d) bin fyente md)t in [bcr] @d)n(e gettefen. Qd) mar in [berj @tabt, ate ©ie geftent bet nteinem 33ater maren. 82. I was formerly much happier; I was young and strong. Wast thou always as contented as to-day ? My father was formerly very rich. My sisters were very ill yesterday. How old were you when you were in France ? I was fifteen years and six months old. Was my room open when I was in school ? No, but the windows were open. This girl was much prettier when she was young. John and William were always your friends. Were you not at my brother's when you were in town ? I have known your father when you were still a child. 83. Imperfect Tense: id) fydtte, I had; bu fyatteft, thou hadst; er fyatte, he had; ttnr fjatten, we had; il)r Ijattet,you had; fie fatten, they had. 2)te (Sttern, the parents; je^t, now; ber erne, the one; ber anbere, the other. Obs. — (Silt and ember, when not followed by a noun, decline weak or strong, according to the rules for ordinary adjectives. ©n t)atte[t geftent ettten nenen fmt; fjctft bntfyn bertoren? £)er £mt, ten id) geftern fycttte, geljbrt nteinem ©rnber. Qf)x fyattet triele — 49 — greimbe, a(# ifjr nod) jung maret; tnarum f)abt ifyr |e|t fo ttentge? SBtr fyaben mefyr greunbe ate i£)r. 2)ten Citfel Ijat afte ^ferbe, Me er efjemats fyattc, derfauft. Qd) ^atte jiDei ©djroeftern; bie cine tear in SSten, bie cmbere in ^Berlin; t)aft bn fie gefannt? 3d) ^abc bie* jenige gefannt, bie in Berlin wax; fjatte fie nid)t jtDei Zodjttv? fatten ©ie nidjt uier £)aujer in ber ©tabt? ®ie tjaben 9M}t; aber id) fyabe jfaei Don biefert §aufern oerfaitft; id) f)atte in bem einen ge- ttofmt, nnb mein 23rnber in bem anbern. I had formerly little money; but I am now richer than you. You were (had in German. See2so.1T) wrong, my dear friend; but your brothers were right, Xobody had any money for my brother when he was in Cologne. Did you have (had you) your lessons when you were yesterday in school ? Xo, I was sick; but my brother had all his lessons. Hadst thou still thy parents when thou wast in Boston ? Where had you your books when you were in the house of your sister ? My brother had them in his room. We had few friends when we were in Berlin, but we had many when we were in Cologne . Where are the little dogs which Miss Emily had when she was at your mother's ? She has sold the one, and the other is dead. How many servants had you when you were in France ? What had you in your hands when you were in your room ? I had a piece of sugar in the one hand, and two little bullets in the other. 85. Mm. id), I; bu, thou; er, he; fie, she; e§, it; DaL mir, tome; bir, to thee; ifjm, to him; itjr, to her; tfytn, to it. Infinitives: faufett, to buy; t!juit,t to do; tterfaufen, to sell; rnad)ert,f to make, to do; gebert, to give; lejett, to read; letfyett, to lend; Men, to see; fd^reiben, to write. 2Bad)fam,- watchful; bie geit, the time; £uft t)aben, to have a mind; bie @ute, the kindness. *ber Scaler, the dollar; 3d) farm, I can; bit fantift, thou canst; er farm, he can; rotr fomten, we can; ifyr to tint, you can; fte formett, they can. In/in.: fontten, to be able. f 2ftad)en and tfytm are thus distinguished in German: ttjutt Lsto act for and tv— pose; mad)en, to act for the production of a work. — 50 — Obs. — (1) All German infinitives end inn (mostly in en). — (2) English infinitives with to must generally be rendered by German infinitives with m. If the English infinitives lose their sign to, the German corresponding infini- tive is generally employed without ju; id) farm lefen, I can read; id) f)abe 511 tfyurt, / have to do. — (3) The German infinitive is placed last in the ordinary sentence, but so that it precedes the past participle, if there is one. (4) The English objective case (me, thee, him, etc.) must be translated by the German dative, if we may supply the preposition to : Give me (to me) your pen, (jeben ©tC mtr 3fyre ^^ e ^» — (5) Personal pronouns in the accusa- tive or dative (without prepositions), must generally be placed before the accusative or dative of substantives, and before all other adjuncts of the verb. $cmnft bit mir biefeS 33ud) letfjeu ? 3dj fann bir biefeS 33ud) nidjt teifjen; e£ gc^ort meinem better ipeinricf). SSer fann btefen 33rief lefen? Qd) fann ifyn lefen; er ift fcfjr gut gefdjrieben. 2Bir lonnen biefen 2Korgen nid)t fdjreiben. ©arum fount i|r nidjt \dy:cU ben ? Sir fjaben feme £inte. Sonuen @ie meinem 33ruber Qfyxt Utjr teifyen ? Qd) fann il)m nteine Ufjr nidjt Ieif)en r id) Ijabc fie bent £>crrn @. Derfauft |)aben @ie meiner @d)iuefter cine geber gegeben ? Qd) Ijabe ifjr feine geber gegeben. £>aben @ie 2uft, biefen §unb ju faufen ? 3d) fjabe feine 8uft, iljn ju faufen; er ift nid)t toad) f am. §at ^l)r -©ruber fyeute nid)t$ gu ttjun ? Sr f)at brei 33riefe ja fdjreiben. SSir l)abeu nod) jmei Slufgaben 3U madjen. 3d) Ijatte geftern ba$ SJergniigeu, $l)x graulem @$mefter ju fc^cn. Spabeu ©ie 3eit, biefen 33rief 3U lefen ? 3d) fyabe jefet feine £tit, ifyu gu lefen. Sonnen ©ie mir etncn ^egeufdjirm geben? Qd) fann Ql)nm feinen gebeu, id) Ijabe nur einen. 3*) r § err ^ntber f)at bie ©ttte, mir ben feinigen ju teiljen. ©tub @ie geftern bei meiner Xante gemefen ? 9?cin, id) wax geftern nid)t bei il)r; id) fyatte ju bide ©efdjafte. 86. Can you do that exercise? Yes, lean (do it); but my brother cannot (can it not do). Will you (JBollen Sie) lend me your penknife ? I cannot lend thee my penknife; my sister has taken it. Have you given a pen to my cousin ? Yes, I have given him one. Hast thou sold thy dog to my sister ? I have not sold her my dog. Canst thou not lend me twenty dollars ? I cannot do it to-day. We can read this book. These gentle., men cannot write their letters; they have no paper. Hast — 51 — thou a mind to buy a pair of boots ? Has jour brother a mind to sell his ring ? Had you the kindness to give a glass of crater to this poor man? My friend had the pleasure to see his parents. I had no time to read all these letters. My father had the kindness to buy me a gold watch. Hast thou seen it ? I have not yet seen it. Have you been with Ferdinand to-day? I have been with him this morning. 8T. Norn, fair, we; it)r (@te), you; fte, they; Dal im$, to us; cud) (3fyrten), to you; ifyneti, to them. gefyett, to go; fern, to be; fommen, to come; toernt, if; trinfen, to drink; untoofyt, unwell; man, one; effett, to eat; ba3 Ungliicf, the misfortune; Ijaben, to have; ba% ^aav, the pair, the couple. id) null, I will; bu ruittft, thou wilt; er null, be will; nnr roolien, we will; ifyr tuollt, you will; fte ttootten, they will. Inf.: tuotten, to be willing. Obs. — Clauses introduced by rocitu require the verb to be placed last in the clause; the same as in relative sentences (No. 45). SBiflft bu mtt nur gefyen? Qi) farm nidjt mtt btr gefyen, id) fjabe feine 3eit. 3d) tt»tt bir em fd)one3 ©ud) (cifyen, wcwx bu fleiftig bift. garni beut ©ruber I)cute nidjt fommen? (5r l)at fefatc fiuft 311 fommen; cr ift imtDol)!. 2£ir Gotten je$t imfere 2tufgaben madjeu. 2Bolfeu (Sic em @la$ 2$etn trinfen? SRettt, aber id) mil eiu StitcE gfeifdj ober Siife effen. Swollen ©te tin mertig ©enf unb ©at} ? fiomtcn ©te imS biejen ©anb leiijen? Qd) faun Qi)\\cn biefen ©anb nicfjt letljen, mem ©ruber totll if)u l)abeu. )3lan taxxn nidjt uuglucfltdjer fern, al$ btefer juuge 2)tamt; er f)at feme ©Sent unb feme ©ruber unb ©djroeftcrtt Derloren. 23er null biefen Slpfet? 3d) toW iljn Ijaben. 2Ba8 wo lit ifjr je^t ttytm ? 335tr tooKen tin ^aar ©riefe fdjretben. 3d) will eudj emeu Sorb Strfdjen geben, totmx tf)r fletjjtg fein foolft. SBottett ©te bie ©itte Ijaben, mtr cine 9iabel 311 geben ? $d) babe jefct feine, id) fann ^fyncu feine gebeu. §abcn ©ie £t\t, mit un$ ju geben ? 3$ ljabe feine gtit, mtt Sijnett jit gefyen. 88. What hast thou to do ? I have nothing to do. Wilt thou read this book ? Yes, 1 will read it. How is ( 23a3 mad)t) thy — 52 — brother ? He is unwell, he cannot come. Where can one buy these fine penknives? One can buy them at our neighbor's. Will you give us a little ink? Can your sister lend us her pen- knife? What do these gentlemen want (what will these etc.)? These ladies will buy an umbrella. One cannot be more un- happy than I [am], one cannot have more misfortune than I. Give us something to drink. What will you [have] ? Will you have wine or water ? Have I not lent you my cane ? No, you have not lent it to me. Where are your brothers ? I have sold them my dog. These men are very rich; all these houses be- long to them. 89. v i r> , (to me; *-, ( to thee; Singular. Bat. mtr, \ to mygelf; btr, -j to thysdf; j ijjm, Ujr, ifym, to him, to her, to it; j ftd), to himself, to herself, to itself, to one's self. Ace. mtd) f |^; elf; bid), {Myself; f tljtt, fte, ei, him, her, it; ) fid), himself, herself, itself, one's self. ■m 7 r> x (to us; *• ( to you; Plural. Dot. Ut&, j tQ oi ; rgeIves; eud), \ to > ourselves; j itjnen, to them (Sfjneu, to you); j ftd), to themselves, (to yourselves, to yourself). Ace. MS, {ourselves; euc ^' {yourselves; j fie, them (Eie, you); j fid), themselves, (yourselves, yourself). Infinitives. ^ ast Participles. Cobett, to praise; gelobt, praised; fd)lagen, to beat, to strike; gefdjfagen, beaten, struck; ttmfdjett, to wash; geroajdieit, washed; uerletym, to hurt; Derle^t, hurt; fpteien, to play; fiejpielt, played; erlaubett (with dat.), to permit, to allow; ertciltbt, permitted, allowed; toertljetbigen, to defend; Derttjeibtgt, defended; bejdnitbtgen, to accuse; befijutbigt, accused; cntid)u(btgen, to excuse: entfdjulbtgt, excused; ijanbeln, to act; gef)aubelt acted; retten, to save; gerettet, saved; fpred)en, to speak, to talk; gefprodjen, spoken, talked; fd)imben, to cut; gefdjnitten, cut; Queie^en, to expose; au3gefe£t, exposed; in 2ld)t nel)mett (with Ace), to take care of; in 2W)t genommeit, taken care of. — 53 — 2)er 2U)Docat, the lawyer; ba« ©efdjtcf, the ability; ber Wlutf), the courage; btc @eife, the soap; ber 2>tanb f the dust; bte 2Irntee, the army; ber Pe&adjA the suspicion; fcorjtdjtig, cautious; uuoorft(i)ttg f incautious; artgenel)irt, pleasant; imiuigenefjm, unpleasant; fo, thus; ba (conjunction), since; meil, because. Obs — (1) SBctl and ba (since) require the following verb to be at the end of the clause (No. 45).— (2) Adjectives are generally preceded by their qualify- ing words or adjuncts: G?3 ift Hlir angenefjm, it is pleasant to me. £)er Center Ijat bid) gelobt, mil bn ftei^ig getnefen bift. ©eirt ©ruber ift em bofer Snabe; cr fjat mid) geftern gefd)tagen. Spaft bu bid) fd)on getoafcfjen? 3d) fyabe mid) nod) nid)t geit>a[d)en; aber ^einrid) fyat fid) fd)on feit einer ©tunbe geroafcfjen. -3$ l ) ai)e wiS fyeute mit etncm 3Kcjfer toerfefet. Sari t)at fid) aud) gefdjnitten; er fyat mit feinem gebcrmeffer gefpielt. ©often Sie unS crlaubcn, in 3^rem ©arteu ju fpieteu ? $d) ttntf e3 endj erlauben, roemt il)r bie ©lumen tit 2Id)t netjmen tooHt. SSarum fcib if)r ljeute uid)t ausge* gangen ? SSir toolkit itu3 iri 2ld)t uefymen, tocit loir franf geroef en finb. g3 ift feidjt, fid) in 2ld)t ju neljmen, toenn man t)orfid)ttg ift. liefer Slboocat l)at bid) mit gropem ®efd)icf Dertfjetbigt. ©it fyaft Unred)t, bid) ju bertfycibigcn, ba bid) nod) 9tiemanb bc|d)ulbigt §at S3 ift Unrcdjt, fid) ju bcrtfyetbigen, tocnn man uid)t bcfdjutbigt ift. <2ie fonnen fid) nid)t entfdjutbigen, [mcine] §erren; SRiemanb !ann fid) entfd)it(bigen, ber fo gefyanbcft fyat. (S3 faun 3§wn uid)t fdjmcr fein, tourer greunb, fid) ju cntfrfjitlbtgcn, ba Sic Dottig (perfectly) 9ted)t babcn. @3 ift meiner 2d)wefter fefyr unangeneljm, fid) in biefer ©efaljr ju fefyen. 90. It is very pleasant to me, to hear you speak thus. It is easy for (to) you to accuse rae if I cannot defend myself. Hast thou hurt thyself, when thou wast in my room? I have not hurt myself, but William has hurt himself with his fork. How can you permit yourself to hurt the trees in my garden ? Thou art right to take care of thyself, since thou hast been sick. These boys have struck me to-day; but thy brother has de- fended me with great courage. William's father has beaten us, because we have played in his garden, Children, I cannot praise you to-day, because you have not done your lessons. (My) gentlemen, you have not been wise; to excuse one's self if one — 54 — is not accused, is incautious, Charles had cut himself when he was in your garden. Will you give me some soap and water ? I will wash myself, and clean myself of the dust. Why have you not been in school, children? We have already excused ourselves with (bet) the teacher. Our army is lost, it cannot save itself. These men have exposed themselves to a great danger. You have exposed yourselves to(a)grave (fdjrocr) sus- picion, since you have taken what does not belong to you. 91. a§, nothing that. refuse) ; Inf. miiffen: id) mufj, I must; bu mugt, thou must; er mug, he must; nrir miiffen, we must; tt)r miiftt, you must; fie muff en, they must. I have been in New York for a year, id) bin [f d) n] f e i t einem 3(ll)r in 9tew 2)or!. Obs. — (1) Clauses, introduced by baft require the verb to be at the end of the clause (No. 45). — (2) The indefinite pronoun mail is only used in the nominative, and is translated by one, by the indefinite people or by they: Man mug fagen, one (they) must say. Often man may be rendered by an English passive construction: man glaubt, it is believed.— (3) The accusative of personal pronouns generally precedes the dative. tonneti ©ie rntr fagen, mo $err 2flofl tootynt? -3d) fann [c8] 3tynen nid)t fagen. 2Botten ®te mtr bicfc geber lei^en ? Qd) fann fie Sfynat nidjt lettjen, fie getjort rntr mdjt Qd) mufe I)eute bent grautcin ©. etnen SSefud) madjen; fie ift geftern mtt il)rer Aflutter an* get omnten. 3Ru|t bit fdjon gefjen ? So finb mcinc &d)i\t)t ? $at ber @d)ul)mad)er fie nod) nid)t gebrad)t? 9?ein, er roitf fie btr in einer ©tunbe fdjid en. Sie femnft bn [c»] hriffen ? (5r l)at [c8] mtr ge^ fagt. £>etn ©ruber mug nod) feme Slufgaben madjen. Sir miiffen — 55 — 3ffe3 tljun, toa$ nnfern Sticrn nnb gdjrcrn angeneljm ift Ofyr mftfct mcincn Setter befndjen; er ift feit bret 2Bod)en frant Jpeinrid) imb SBiHjcfat miiffcn Dtdc 33nd)er fyaben. SBfrut mu§ nidjt ansgefyen, »cnn man franf ift SJian muB fid) nidjt Dertfjeibtgen, toenn man nidjt befdjulbtgt ift @ie miiffcn nid)t 2Ule3 gtaubcn, tt>a$ man $t)ntn fagt @ie miiffcn fief) ntd)t folder ©efafjr ausfefcen. 2ftan glanbt, baB bie s $ren£cn bie feinbtidje Slrmee gefd)tagen Ijaben. %Jlan fagt, bap ber gcinb fid) nid)t {anger ttertfyeibigen fann. 2Kan gfaubt nid)t, baj3 bit bie^ SJud) gefd)rieben Ijaft (Sic miiffcn fid) in 3ld)t nefjmen, »cnn Sie in mcincn ©arten gefyen toolfcn. @te miiffcn tmffen, ba§ $f)v grennb far! fid) gemetgeri fyat, mir jctte 33iid)er gn fdjicfen. SSarum I)aft bn btcf) gemeigert, nad) SBicn git gefyen? Qd) fyabe mid) titdf)t gemeigert, nad) SSien gn gefyen; abcr id) mnfc fnrdjtcn, baft id) bort feine ©efdjafte madjen fann. SSir fyaben un$ genmgert, bir nnjcr §an£ gn Derfanfen, toeit e$ fur bid) git grojs ift SBir finb fd)on feit t>ter SSodjen hi ber ©tabt, abcr Sitcmanb tjat un$ cinen iBefnd) gc* madjt 92. My friend had the kindness to send me a basket of cherries. You have not yet sent me my book. Who has taken my pen ? I cannot tell (it) thee. This penknife belongs to my brother; thou must give it to him. Charles will not lend me his um- brella. Why will he not lend it to thee ? One must not pay visits if one is unwell. One must promise nothing that one cannot do. One must never praise one's self. I can promise you a great pleasure if you will make the acquaintance of my friend; you must pay him a visit. I cannot believe (it) that you have such suspicion. It is said that you have been for two years in this country. It has been said that you have re- fused to pay a visit to your sick brother. We have not refused to write this letter, but we must be cautious in this affair (@e- fdjfift). Must we not be afraid that our friends have lost all (that) they have ? We will do nothing that can be unpleasant to you, but you must have the kindness to do what you have promised to us. — 56 — part in. 93. Present Indicative, Sing. L icf) lobe, I praise, I am praising, I do praise; 2. (bu (obcft),* bu fobft, thou praisest, etc.; 3. (er (obet), er kib£, he praises; Plural. L mir foben, we praise; • 2. (ifjr lobet), ifjr lobt, you praise; 3. fie loben, they praise. Imperative. Sing. lobe (bu), praise (thou); Plural, lobt (it)r), praise (you) ; lobetl ®ie, praise (you) [for polite conversation]. gtnben, to find; ft>iinjd)en, to wish, to desire; jud)en (with ace), to seek, to look for; arbeiten, to work, to labor; tt)of)tten, to dwell, reside, live; ba3 Xud), the cloth; brtngen, to bring; bie @traJ3e, the street; bebauern, to regret, to pity; ber 23 ud) I) an bier, the bookseller; baueu, to build; - 3ebermamt, every body; retten, to ride; fcfyarf, sharp; taDeltt, to censure, to blame; 8^3, whole* Obs. — 1. The e in the endings of the 2d and 3 1 pers. sing, and 2d plural is always used if the infinitive ends in ben or ten (finben, arbeiten). In verbs with infinitives in e(n and eru (tabetn, bebauern) the e of the ending is dropped in all persons, except the 1st pers. sing. 2. The demonstrative pronoun that, used without a noun, and referring to something mentioned before, or pointed at, is rendered by the neuter t>a$ or bte§ (instead of btefes). 3. Mixed fractions are placed wholly before the following noun: greet unb eine ttiertel Sftetle, two miles and a quarter. 2Ba3 fudjett @ic ? Q&) fudje nteme geber* 2Rem ^Bruber fudjt femett ©(ctfttft. SStr fucfyen imfertt Jpimb. £)tcfe Stnber fudjett tljre 33iicf)ei\ 2Bo f aufert ©tc Qljv papier ? 2£ir laufen unfer papier The forms enclosed in parentheses are obsolete. — 57 — bet bent Sudjljanbfer. 3d) finbe metnert <&tod nidjt. Set fjat meincit ©tod genommen? Qdj gfaubc, ba£ $|t ©ruber iljrt ge= nommen fjat. 34 liebe bicfcn i?nabeu ntd)t; er ift immcr unartig. £>u tiebft beinen Sefyrcr. ©ott tiebt tie guten 3Kenfd}eju @ute ®tn* ber fieben itjre SItern. 3ft e£ waljr, baft 3fyr Cnfet fein £>au3 t>er= fauft? SSte tfyeuer oerfaufctt Ste bic (a) fettc don biefem £ud)e? 3d) aerfaufe btc (a) (Site btefeS SEud^eS 3U (at) t)ier Stljatero, £>a3 ift fcfjr tljeuer. tfinbeft bu nidjt, £)etnridj, ba£ ba3 fef)r tljeuer ift? 3^, id) finbe e3 fefyr tfjeuer. SSir t)erfaufett aber biel toon btefem £ud)e. 3ebermann finbet e§ fd)on. Sdjicfetx 2ie mir brei unb eine fjatbeGlfe! SBiffcn ©ie, too id) woljne? JJa, 2ie toofjnen in ber ®arfeftra§e. 3d) nui§ toiinfrfjcn, ba§ erjud)en, to attempt, to try, to en- fenben, to send; tobtert, to kill; [deavor; fennen*, to know; beabjtd)ttgen, to intend; lernen, to learn; t>er(a(fen, to quit, to leave; begtetten, to accompany; fid) begeben, to proceed, to betake amiiftren, to amuse; one's self; ber SBerfud), the attempt; benten, to think; ber Xob, the death; fief) befdjeifttgen, to occupy one's self; bte 2lbfid)t, the intention, design; brennett, to burn; bte 23erftarfttng, the reinforcement; reben, to speak; bit Sfteife, the journey; bemerfen,to perceive; bte 2lnftmft, the arrival; l)inretdjen, to be sufficient; ba$ @elb, -the money; Ijelfen, (with dat.), to help; bte 2$ofyuung, the residence; au3fuf)rett, to accomplish; ber 23ote, the messenger; ernjarteu, to expect; ba3 ^Setter, the weather; ditjeigen, to announce; ttcifyrcnb, ** while. Obs.— 1. The imperfect ending is ete in regular verbs ending in ben, ten, gnen and d)nen (idj rebete, arbettete, e$ regnete), except fenben and men* ben, which generally form fattbte, manbte. 2. The imperfects of bringen and benfenare bradjte and badjte; of brennen, brannte; Fennen, Fannte; nennen, nannte; reitnen, rannte. 3. SBoften forms regularly rooftte; Fomten makes Fonnte, and mitffen, mnJ3te, both without softening the vowel. 3d) roollte is translated by / was willing, I intended, I was going to, I wished; id) ruottte nid)t, / was unwilling, I did not choose; id) muftte, I was obliged to; id) Fonnie, I could. 4. If conjunctions that throw the verb to the end of the clause(bd{3, (ll$, roemt, ba, met!, ro&fyrenb etc.) precede their principal sentences, the verb of the latter is placed before its subject: id) g etje , roenn er fommt, I go if he comes, roenn er fommt, g e I) e id) , if he comes, I go. * $emten (to know) means 'to have an acquaintance with somebody or something'; ttriffen, (to know) means 4 to have a knowledge of something,' ** 28al)renb requires the verb to be at the end of the clause. — 59 — 5. In this instance (Obs. 4) the principal sentence is often preceded by the adverb fo, which in that position cannot be expressed in English: 2$emt er fommt, j o get)e id). 6. Feminine nouns consisting of more than one syllable, except those in funft and nif^ take en in all cases of the plural, without softening the radical vowel* For feminine nouns in cl and er see p. 33. Qd) war tit bem ©arten, ate bein 23ruber unS bcfudjte. 21(3 23oottj Slbrafyam gtucobt tobtete, wax id) m £eutfd)iaub> Qcfy U)imfd)te beinen ©ruber in SSten 3U fet)en r ba id) tl)n in Berlin md)t fefjen fonnte. ©a id) alfeS @elb tterloren fyxtte, beabfiditigte id) tncinc LU)t ju tjcrlaufcn. ©a id) s £ari3 dcrtaffctt umjjte, fo rooflte td) mid) nad) Sofn begeben, 2Str mad)tcn feinen 93erfudj nad) bet ©tabt ju gefyen, meil e3 ben ganjen Jag reguete. SSeit 9iicmanb fitr beinen 33m* ber rebete, fo t>erfucf)ten toir [efr], if)rt ju scrtfycibtgett. SSir fpieltcn in bem ©arten, mafjrenb bein ©ruber in feincm 3immer arbettete. SSatjrenb wiv bet btr fpeiften, brannte unfer §au3. 2U3 ftur bid) nicf)t im §aufe bemerften, batten tour, bap bit bid) tut ©arten befdjafttgteft. SBenn bit bid) wetgerft, un$ betne 2Ibfid)ten ju fagen, fo fbnnen wiv btr nid)t Ijelfen* ®a| bein ©ruber in unferer Stabt tooljute, lonnte id) niefct nnffeu. 96. I did not attempt to proceed to Paris since my money was not sufficient for the journey. We did not expect the arrival of thy brother, since it rained the whole day. Since my brother refused to help me, I could not accomplish my designs. Since my friends were afraid to come to (ju) us, we were obliged to visit them. We were expecting the arrival of your brother, when a messenger brought us your letter that announced his death. We could not yesterday come to town, because the weather was bad. Just (©erabe) because he was wrong, I did not answer him. Why did you not send your son, if you could not come to town? If you thought so of him, you did not know the man. My brother was learning his lesson while I accompanied Charles into the garden. While our house was burning, I amused myself with my friend William. That Henry did not choose to come, I could not — 60 — know. Since Mr. Davis was going to sell the house in which I lived, I was obliged to look for another residence. When we perceived the designs of the enemy, we sent reinforcements into the village. 97. Future Indicative, id) U)erbe loben. I shall or will praise; 1 am going to praise; bu ttnrft loben, thou wilt praise; er roirb loben, he will praise; rotr uoerben loben, we shall praise; ifyr ruerbet loben, you will praise; fte njerben loben, they will praise. $cf)t Sage, a week; ber X'xtntx, the man-servant; fcter 5 et)U Sage, a fortnight: mitnefymen, to take along; bie*, till, until; in $tt)et bis brei Xa= anfommen, to arrive; gen, in two or three days; abreijen, to depart; nod) etnmal, once more; f)5ren, to hear;, ttneber, again; regnen, to rain; morgen. to-morrow; bauern, to last; mbgttd), possible bletben, to remain; ber &rieg, the war; erjucfjen, to request; bie StngeUgenfyeit, the affair; fcevlieren, to lose. Obs. — (1) The rrn-RE is formed by the verb roerben as auxiliary, and the infinitive of the verb without $u. This infinitive in simple sentences must be placed at the end of the clause. The verb Meroen, not followed by an infinitive, denotes to become: fie tDetbcn Jreunbe, they become friends. — (2) Shall in the 2. and 3. pers. sing, and plur. is translated by the verb follcn, which is irregular in the pres. indicative sing,: id) foil, bu fottft, er )oti. Shall in questions is translated by follen even in the first person: shall 1 come, foil id) fommen? — (3) If I will etc. means to be willing, to intend, it should be translated by id) milt. — (4) The interrogative adverb when is translated by roann. 3d) tucrbe biefert 2I6enb ba3 3?ergnligcrt fyaben, metnen Onfct ju fetjen. Qd) toerbe btr btcjen pbfdjen King gebett, rcemt bit ffeiBtg fein trtrft. £)einrid) ftnrb mix ftcute ciu ^paar fcfione £>ar.bfdnif)e tan* fen. Petite Scf)tr>efter nnrb jufrteben fein, toenn fie i|re vXufgabe ge* * 25i§, if it is used as a conjunction has the verb at the end of the clause. — Gl — madjt |at 2Bemt liur in 3ft. fciu werbcn, wcvbcn nnr t)ic£ 23ergnugat fyaben. SSBatm mxbm @ie mid) befudjeu? 3d) gtaube, ba§ »»i Sie morgen befudjen toerbcn. SDteine 4)ruber toerben fyeute ober morgen and) fommeu. S3 ipirb meinem 93ater feljr Diet SSerguitgen madjen (give), fie nod) etnmal ju fcfjcn. SSamt Herbert Sie $l)rem greimbe ifarf fdjreiben? $d) tncrbe H)tn in adjt bis Hierje^n £agcu fdjreiben. Soften Sie bie ©iitc fyabcn, mir ba3 33ud) jii fd)tden, toetdjeS Sie mir oerjprodjeu fjaben? 3d) ix>erbe e3 $l)nen Ijcute fdjiden, grauiein. 3Kctn Wiener xoxxb e$ Qfynm bringen. 3^ Sreunb fdjetnt (seems) arm jn roerben. Soft id) ^^nen je^t Ijelfen, ober foil id) im ©arten arbeiten, 6i3 Sie fcrtig (done) fein rcerben? £5a bn bid) morgen nad) SSien begeben nnrft, fo erfucfye id) bid), meinen @ot)n mitjunel)* men. iBleiben ©ie in Berlin, bt3 id) bort anfommen tterbe? 98. Will you go with us ? I do not believe that my father will allow (it to) me. Has the shoemaker brought my boots? No, he will bring them to you this evening. What shall we do now? We will go to town together (together to town). Will you have the kindness to lend me your horse ? I shall lend it to you with much pleasure. We shall play to-day in the garden of our uncle; he will allow us. This man is becoming rich. I hear that thou art going to depart for Germany; wilt thou not take along thy children? Mr. Xollet has (is) arrived who desires to speak with you. Tell him that I will not see him. My father will arrive here in [a] short time; will you visit him? Excuse me, I must depart in three or four hours. It will not be possible for (to) me to see him. Since the war will last longer than we expected, it will be better if we remain in the country. Will you accompany us if we go to town ? If your friend is losing so much money, he will soon become poor. What will your father say, if he hears that you are going to leave the country? I shall not write you again till I shall come (till I .come) to Yienna. Will the weather be good or bad to-morrow ? I believe that it is going to rain to-morrow. Shall I try it once more? Do not try it till you have spoken again with me. Do you know that our friend William is going to leave our town ? — 62 — When is he going to depart ? I believe that he will depart in five or six days. If thou wilt (ttnfift) bring me pen T ink, and paper, I shall try to write that letter for you. Present Subjunctive, Sing, id) lobe, I praise (praised etc.); bu lobeft, thou praise (praisedst etc.); Ct lobe, he praise (praised etc.). Plur. tinr loben, tljr lobet, fie lobett. Imperfect Subjunctive, id) lobte etc. (like imperfect indicative). Perfect Indicative. id) l)Clbe (t)U Ijaft, er l)(tt etc.) gelobt, I hare praised. Perfect Subjunctive. id) l)abe (bit Ijabeft, er Ijabe, roir Ijaben, tljr tyatet, fte Ija* ben) gelobt. Perfect Infinitive. gelobt fjaben, gelobt gu Ijaben, to have praised. Pluperfect Indicative. id) ^atte (ton Ijatteft etc.) gelobt, I had praised. Pluperfect Subjunctive, id) Ijatte (bu l)(itteft etc.) gelobt Obs. — 1. The present subjunctive generally does not drop the e in the endings. The third person sing, is always like the first. 2. The first persons subjunct. present of fonnen, rooEen, ntitffeu are: id) fotttte, id) roolle, id) tttiiffe, and are conjugated like the subjunctive of id) lobe. §aben, to have, makes the pres. subj.: id) ijabe,' bu Ijabeft, er Ijabc, ttrir Ijaben, tl)r Ijabet, fie Ijaben, @etn, to be, has the pres. subj.: id) jet, bu feteft, er fet, nnr feien, tfyr feiet, fte feien. 3. The imperfect subjunctives of fomten, roollett, tttiiffert are: id) fottttte, (could), roollte, mitgte. §aben, fern, brtngen, benfen soften in the imperf. subjunct. the a of their imperfect indicatives: id) mare (I were), tdj bftdjte, id) briidjte. ®enben, roenben, brennen, fennen, nentteit, remten form their imperf. subjunct. regularly, restoring the e of the infinitives: id) fenbete, rcenbete, brennte, fennte, nennte, renttte. 4. The perfect indie, of Ijabeit and fettt are: id) Ijabe geljabt, I have had; id) bin gettrefen, I have been; perfect subjunctive: id) l)abe (bu Ijabeft etc.) ge* Ijabt; id) fei (bu feteft etc.) geroefen; pluperfect indicative: id) l)atte geljabt, I had had; id) mar geroefen, lhad been; pluperfect subjunctive: id) t)atte ge* l)abt; id) mare geraefen. 5. In clauses introduced by b ft j$ the subjunctive is under certain cir- cumstances more generally used than the indicative. This is the case if the clause introduced by bafj is dependent on a verb of hearing, thinking, be- lieving or saying, in the imperfect or pluperfect tense: I believe that he comes, id) gtaube, baft er to m m t ; but: I believed that he came (was coming), id) glaubte, baft er f ttt lit e. Such verbs as require the verbs in the following clause to be in the sub- junctive are: benfen, ubeqeugt fein, fyoren, glauben, roalnicn, fiirdjten, fagen, antroorten, (djreiben, and the like. — 63 — 6. In clauses introduced by that, the English past tense is translated either by the present or imperfect subjunctive, and the English pluperfect either by the pereect or pluperfect subjunctive: They believed that he learned, fte fltaubteit, baft cr I e r it e (or 1 e r it t C). They said that he had learned, ftefagten, ba|3 cr getcttlt Ij a b e (or I) a 1 1 e ). But the use of the present and perfect subjunctives must be avoided, when its forms would not be distinguishable from the indicative : id) glaubte, bag fte Icrnten (not (eriteit); tdj gtaubte, ba$ fte gelentt fatten (not fyaben). 7. In all these constructions the conjunction ba\$ may be omitted, and the verb (subjunctive) of the clause takes its place immediately after the subject : id) gtaubte, er fet in ber 3tabr, I believed he was in the city. 8. The same usage cf the subjunctive takes place in clauses introduced by ob (whether, if), after the imperfect or pluperfect of verbs of asking (frageu) or doubting (;unetfeln): id) fragte tint, ob er franf fet (or retire), I asked him whether (if) he was sick. If the clause introduced by ba$ depends on verbs in the present or future, the subjunctive is more rarely used than the indicative. 2Baf)tten, to suppose (wrongly); mt^uiajftg, inadmissible; rjermutfyen, to presume; nd)ttg, correct; erfttiren, to declare; unrtd)ttg, incorrect; CUUtefymeit, to accept; taaftd), daily; bcf)cmpteu, to state, to assert; bte 3ufnl)i*, supply, provision; bemerfen, to remark; ber 25orjd)lctg, the proposition; fdjetnen, to seem; bte 2Inftd)t, the view; fragen, to ask (a question); bte ^Butter, the butter; r)crftd)ent, to assure; ba$ di (pi. (Sier), the egg) uorberettett (past part. t>orberettet) f to bte 2Baf)rl)ett, the truth; prepare; bte (SefeUfcfjaft, the company; tengnen, to deny; bte ®d)tad)t, the battle; $roetfeln, to doubt; ber (General, the general; gafjten, to pay; *ber (nnroolnter, the inhabitant; iibeqeugt, convinced; ob, whether, if. Qi) glaubte, ba§ cr fptete. Q&) glaubte, ba§ fie fpieften. Qfy lrjal)ttte, ba£ bu Iran! feieft. Qi) tttcifyntc, bu feieft franf. SSMr t)er^ rmitfyeteu, ba^ bu bcine 9Iuf gaben lernteft. £>ie getnbe badjtcn, batf ttrir feine gufuljren fy&ttw* SD^eine greunbe fitrdjteten, id) fci tobt. (5r tt>ar Uberjeugt, baft tdj mid) nad) Berlin begebctt [)atte. 5Dcm greunb erftarte, baft er bcincn 23orfd)fag ntd)t annef)meu fonue. Siefe SKanner flatten beljaupict, bap bu in Sofn ftoljntcft. 3d) && merfte, baft biefe 2lnfid)t unrtdjitg jit fein fdjeine. (£r t»erfirf)erte mir, _ 64 — baft cr hnmer biefe Slbfidjt grfjabt Ijabe, £cr Center badjte, ba£ roir im$ nidjt t>orberettet fatten. 9)tone greunbe fd)riebcn mir, fie brad;= ten tagfid) Sutter unb Gier nadj ber Stabt SBiHjefm leugnctc, bap cr jemate bie Slbfidjt gefyabt Ijatte, fcin £)au£ gu fcerfaufen. £)eitt SBater fragte mid), ob id) jemate in Sien gen>efen feu Qd) jmeifelte, ob biefer Sttamt bir bie SSafyrfyeit fage. 100. My brother thought that thou AYast working; but I was afraid that thou wast playing. He supposed [wrongly] that I was wrong. He often £old me (told me often) that he had never had such a suspicion, We presumed, Henry was in your company. Were you not convinced that we could not lose that battle? The general declared that these propositions were inadmissible. He stated that the English were sending provisions, and that the inhabitants were bringing them to the city. How could you say that I was living in France ? Did I not always say that your views were correct ? He remarked that he knew me, and [that] your suspicion could not be correct. My brother asked me whether I had ever had such designs ? Henry answered me that he was not prepared to declare his views; he doubted if we could pay that money. I supposed you were accompanying your brother. I was afraid you were dead, since I had heard that you had not been in town for a month. 101. Future Subjunctive, id) fterbe foben, bu irjerbeft foben, er toerbe foben, ttnv roerben foben, ifyr raerbet ioben, fte merben foben. Conditional, id) roiivbe Ioben, I should or would praise; bit ttmrbeft foben, thou wouldst praise; er ttmrbe foben, be would praise; ft>ir ftmrbeit foben, we should praise; tt)r ttmrbet foben, you would praise; fie ttmrben foben, they would praise. Obs.~ 1. If a clause, introduced by if, is dependent on a verb in the potential mood with should, would, could, might, the clause is called hypothetical, and requires in German the subjunctive of the imperfect for the English past tense, and the subjunctive of the pluperfect for the — 65 — English pluperfect. The conditional should not be used in clauses intro- duced by tuentt (if) : / should praise you, if you were here, id) nmi'be @te tobeit, Ittentt ^te l)ter Uidren; I should praise you, if you worked (would work), id) ttmvbe && loben, mnn Bit atbeiteten {not arbeiten rtmvben): / should praise you, if you had worked, id) ttmrbe ®ie loben, menu @ie gcarbcitet fatten. 2. In the principal sentence of the hypothetical period the English potential with should or would is rendered either by the German conditional, or by the subjunctive of the imperfect (pluperfect): 3d) mitt be jjnfrteben f e in (or id) m a x e jufrieben), menn fie angefommeu toattn, I sftowZd be pleased if they had arrived. ©te fatten irju getobt, menn @ie l)ter getoefen maren, you would have praised him if you had been here. 3. The English potential with could or might in the principal sentence is generally rendered by the subjunctive of the imperfect (or pluperfect, see p. 108.) of the modal auxiliary totlllCU (id) fomtte) with the infinitive of the verb: G?r fonnte bie§ tfjurt, menu er l)icr mitre, he could (might) do this if he were here. 4. The imperfect subjunctive of the modal auxiliary tttiiffeit (id) miifete) in the principal sentence of hypothetical periods is generally rendered by '/ ought to' or '/ should be obliged to or by similar circumlocutions: Sie miifct en b\e§ miffen, menu <3ie cmfmerfjam maren, you ought to know this if you were attentive. 3d) mugte metnen ^tan aufgeben, menn bte$ ber gad tt)dve f I should be obliged to give up my plan if this were the case. 5. The imperfect subjunctive of the modal auxiliary mogert (id) tnbd)te, see p. 108.) in the principal sentence of hypothetical periods, generally cor- responds to '/ should wish to or 'like to: 3d) modjte irjtt fefyen, menn e§ mogftd) mare, / should wish (ivould like) to see him if it were possible. 6. In all these instances (No. 2 — 5.) the conditional clause is frequently understood: 2Ba§ mitrben ©te tfynn? what would you do? 7. The English potential with should or would in clauses introduced by that (bctJ3), is expressed either by the subjunctive of the future, or by the conditional (especially with a plural verb). But after verbs of wishing, would is expressed by mcd)te, or by the imperfect subjunctive of the main verb: 3d) fyoffte, bag er fommen merbe (or miirbe), I hoped that he would come, dx gtaubte, baft fie bteiben m iir b en (not merben), he believed that they would remain. 3d) miin|d)te, bag fie fommen mod) ten (or famen), I wished that they would vome. 8. In clauses introduced by that, could generally corresponds to fomtte, and might to mod)te: C£r bad)te, baft fie nid)t fommen f on it ten, he thought that they could not come. C£r fiirdjtetc, baft fie fommen mod) ten, he was afraid that they might come. $bjd)netben, to cut off; mafjfett, to choose, elect; erretdjen, to reach; befolgeu (part, befolcjt), to follow; dnbern (part, gecinbert), to change; reifen, to travel; ^urtidfefyren, to return; ftd) jurucfjteljeit, to retreat; — 66 — emdjtett, to establish; bet Ratty, the advice; beftattgen, to confirm; bet* iBiirger, the citizen; bauctt, to build; bie Sfcegierung, the government; l)offcn f to hope; ba3 ^oftcttttt, the post-omce; fortfefcen, to continue; gent, gladly, willingly; bet* $tt)etn, the Rhine; fpat, late; ber ^rciftbent, the President; batb, soon; bcr SBejd)iuf3, the resolution; gefunb, healthy; ber (befallen, the favor; fparfcutt, economical. 35er ©encrat fitrdjiete, ba$ bie gembe fetne gufuljren abfdjnetbett toiirben, SStr fiird)teten, ba£ bu $u fpat fommen mbd)teft ©ein better nntnfdjte, ba£ bu bid) nad) SBieu begeben ntudjtcft £)ie (Sin* iDoIjner ^offten, ba§ bie gctnbe bie @tabt ntdjt erretdjen fonnten, $cf) gtaubte nidjt, ba£ bcin SBruber feine 2lnftd)t anbern tt>erbe. Sir Der- ntutfjetcn, ba% kavl feine Stufgabeu nidjt fyaben nmrbe. Qdj badjte bu iDerbeft bafb jurudfe^rcn. Qd) nmrbe gliicflidfjer fein, menu id) 33itd)er unb grcunbe Ijcitte. Qd) nmrbe mel)r SScrgniigcn Ijaben, warn ineine @d)tt)eftcru Ijter toaren. ®u ttmrbeft nid)t fo reid) fein, menu bu nidjt fo fcicle ©efdjafte gemadjt ljatteft. SBemt £>einvid) ©elb Ijatte, nmrbe er biefe SOfcffer faufeu. Qd) nmrbe beinen $rttber be> fudjen, wcrnt id) 3ctt tjcittc. 28ir nmrben bid) nid)t tabefn, roemt bu fleipiger genoefen roareft. SBeta Dnfcl fagte mir, bu ttmrbeft morgeit nid)t fommen. 2Bctd)en oon biefeu ©tocfat ipixrbeft bu iDal)Ien ? Sent nritrbet i()r eure SBlimten geben ? 23a3 ttmrbeft bu fagen, ttenn id) mcin ^fcrb Dcrf auf te ? Qd) xoixxbt bir ertauben ju fpiefen, tt)enn bu beine Slufgaben gemad)t ljatteft SBcnn bu £tit ju tefen ljatteft, ttmrbc id) bir eht nu£ftd)e$ 33ud) leifyen. Qd) ttutrbe gent mit bir gefjen, toemt mcin Scorer c$ ertaubtc; id) mujj fyeute [nod)] brei 33ricfe fd)reibeu. Qd) bvadjtc bir gern beine 23itd)er, koenn id) fie fyatte. £)eht 23atcr todre jefet reid), menu cr nteineu SSorfdjIag befotgt Ijatte, £)u ljatteft 9tcd)t, menu tt>ir in granfreidj todren. -3d) fdjitfte bir meinett £)iener, menu cr nid)t auSgegcutgen tt>dre. 2£enn tt)ir in 55eutfd)lvinb moljnten, fo ptteft bu nid)t fo Diet ©elb fcerforcn. SBenn bu bid) in 2td)t genomnteu fjdtteft, fo ttmrft bu jefet nidjt frant £)cine greunbe fbuuten bir nidjt fo Diet ©elb geben, roenn fie nidjt reid) ttdren. $d) ntbdjte nad) £)eutfd)tanb reifen, tt)enn id) meljr ©elb l)dtte* 2)u fomiteft bcin ©efd)dft fortfe^en, menu bu t)orfid)tiger toareft. (gr tonnte gefunb fein, menn er einen Slrgt geljabt ^atte. 3f)r ntiijstet retdjer fern, tomn H)t fpctrfctm getnefen rodret. SBemt bit inetncm 9?adibar ntdjt ©e(b gegeben Jjatteft, miijjte er |cin £)au3 ucrfaufcn. SBettst ttnr jinei Stimmen (votes) mefyr gefyabt fatten, fo Ijatte bcirt S3ater 9ted)t gefyabt. 102. We thought that the enemy (pi.) would retreat to the Rhine. Charles did not doubt that you would return in five or six days. The inhabitants wished that the government would establish a new post-office. All citizens expected that the President would confirm these resolutions. We were afraid that you might choose the wrong (unredjt) way. Louisa would be much (fel)r) pleased if she had these flowers. Henry would not have so many friends if he were not so kind (gut) and diligent. We should not yet have (be) arrived if we had not received a letter from your father. We should not have sold our house if my father had done more business (pi.). The teacher would blame thee if thou hadst not done thy exercises. I should not believe it if thou hadst not seen it. If I had money I should buy a pound of cherries. If you would tell me where Mr. N. lives, I would give you two dollars. Would you be- lieve that I had done this ? Would you do me this favor if I allowed you to amuse yourself this evening? I would do it willingly if I had time. You might be rich now if you had been more cautious in your affairs. Thou mightest live now in a palace ( 2d)(oB) if thou hadst followed my advice. If we should receive reinforcements, we could beat the enemy. They could not have defended (uertljcibigt) themselves if my brother had not helped (gef)o(fcn) them. If they had (were) departed yesterday, they ought to be here now (now here). If you had followed your [own] advice, you would be obliged now to leave the country. I should like to build this house for you if you would (were willing to) pay more money. We should like to follow thy advice, if it were possible. [Use the imperfect in- stead of conditional in the following sentences]. I should bring you your pictures to-morrow if they were done (fcrtig). They would have sent your money a week ago if they had had it. If you had arrived later, you would not have found us in — - 68 town. If I were not sick, I should visit you. IT thou hadst changed thy resolutions, thou wouldst not have lost thy money.- Thou wouldst be lost now if I had not saved (gcrcttct) thee. If you had had less money, you would have been more economical. 103. SCuSgeljett, to go out. id) gelje cms, I go out; bu gel) ft au$, thou goest out; er gefyt cut3, he goes out; toxt gefyen au$, we go out; tljr gefyt au3, you go out; fte gefjeu au§, they go out. aufmadjen, to open; gumadjen, to shut; yxtn&fyitkVL, to send back; Uitteruid)t nefymen, to take lessons; dttHopfeit, to knock (at a door); aiifruadjett, to awake; ftitbtrett, to study; dbfffyreiben, to copy; UUttfyetleit, to communicate; tut$iet)en, to put on; erfranfett, to fall sick; CUtffyoreit, to cease; artfangett, to begin, to commence; geftefyen, to confess; etttfejjen (eine ^a£)e), to be aware (of a thing); fid) ctnHetbcn, to dress (one's self); Clllfftefyetl, to rise (from bed or a fall, etc.); Ctufgefyett, to rise (from the sun, moon, etc.); Utttergeljen, to set (of the sun, etc.); Dor.jtefyett, to prefer; bie 9?ad)rid)t, the news; bie ©erool)Ul)eit, the habit; bte font mo be, the chest of drawers; bte Sftetfe, the journey; bte &afye, the thing; bte Ununffcnfyett, the ignorance; ftfjuiaq, black; friil}, early. Obs. — 1 . Verbs having for prefixes syllables that do not occur as words by themselves, are called inseparable compound verbs. Such prefixes are be, ge, ent (emp), er, Oev, ger. Most other prefixes of verbs are particles (espe- cially prepositions) which also occur as separate words. Verbs compounded with these are called separable compound verbs. The most usual of these particles are: ah, an, auf, au$, bet, nut, rtad), tor, gu, jitriicf, etn, fort, and the compound particles with Ijer and l)ht (fyeroor, ()erauf, etc.). 2. The prefixes of the separable compound verbs are detached from the simple verb in the present, imperfect and imperative, if they stand in or- dinary (see Obs. 4) sentences. The detached prefixes are removed to the end of the clause: er § e t g t c mtr ben £ob femes betters an , he announced t© me the death of his cousin. — GO — 3. If separable compound verbs are construed with infinitives (with gu), the detached prefix is often placed before the infinitive and its adjuncts: 2Btr f a it a. e tt fyeitte a it , ba3 23ud) ju lefcn (or: 2£tr f a tt g e it l)eute ba§ 33ud) git (efcit a it), we begin to-day to read the book. 4. If the separable compound verbs occur in clauses that require the verb to be at the end (No. 45; 95, Obs. 4), the prefixed particles are not de- tached, but keep their connection with the simple verb, the same as in the infinitive: 2)ie $ttabett, bte gtt lefcn a it f a It g e tt , the boys that begin to read; inentt bte $ttabeit 311 tejeit a tt f a it g e tt , if the boys begin to read, etc. 5. The prepositions burd), iiber, tttlt and Hitter are in some compounds separable, and in others inseparable: id) It tt t e r tt e I) tit e , I undertake; but: bte ©onite 3 e t) t it 11 1 e r , the sun sets.f 3d) gcl)e Ijcute mdjt cm3; ba$ SBetter ift gu fd)(ed)t. SSenn ba$ SScttcr fcfjoncr mare, nntrben toir gem au3gel)en. Spctnrtcl), bnmad)ft ttic bie Z\)\m ju. $annft bit biefe $ommobe aufmadjen? $tf)matf)t mem dimmer git, toemt id) anSgefye. Qd) \djidc Qijnax ba3 33nd) jnriitf, midjc^ @te mir gelieljen t)akn. SJtem Setter fdjtdte mir geftent ben ©tocf jnritd, ben id) tl)m getiefyen fjatte. @d)reibft bit atte btcfc ©rtcfe at) ? 3$ H*it§ $f)tten etoa§ mitttjeifett* 2Ba3tt)ofte:t @te mir ntittJjcUen? -3d) tfjctlc 3f)nen cine angenefyme 9?ad)ridjt mit SSelcfyeS Stctb jiel) ft bit fycute ait? 33) Stef^e mem fcfywarjed Sleib an, tmb meine @d)ti)cfter tnirb xijx \vt\$t§ Steib an3te^en. Sfteine ■Kadjbarrt fangen fyeute an, iljre @adjcn git bcrfaufen. ©em grennb fcfetc geftent feine 9tafe fort. SSaljrenb er feine Strife fortfe^te, er* franfte er. SSann Ijorctt @te anf, Unterrtdjt ju ueljmeu ? SBemt id) je^t auf()orte, nntrbe id) nid)t fcijr met nnffen. SSamt gel)tbie@onne im SDfconat SKarj (March) anf ? Sentt bie ©otmc fritt) aufgef)t r gel)t fie fpat unter. SSann ftcfyen ©ie anf? 10-1. Do you not rise yet? No, I am unwell; I shall not rise to-day. You always rise very late; that is a bad habit. Shut the door, if you please. Open the window. Your brother al- ways opens the door and the windows. Do you not go out to- day? I shall not go out to-day. My brother goes out twice every day (every day twice). I shall send you back your umbrella to-morrow. Send me also back the cane which I f If such verbs are inseparable, they are marked with an asterisk. — TO — have lent you. What is my son doing? He copies the letters which yon have written this morning. If my uncle arrives, I shall communicate to him the good news. Do not com- municate him anything. Put on thy new dress. I announced yes- terday to my children that you would visit us to-day. Why do you begin again to take lessons ? Because I am aware of my ignorance. Are you aware that I was right ? No, I am not aware of it. My children begin to study early, and cease [to study] late. Which garden do you prefer, mine or that of my brother ? I must confess that I prefer that of your brother. When my servant knocked [at the door] I awoke, dressed my- self and perceived that I had slept (gefrfjlafen) too long. My brother departed from Vienna while I was preparing my journey. Why do you not prepare your lessons, children? SBauen, to build; f)etratl)ett, to marry; f itfyren, to conduct; ptihtbern, to plunder; gerftoren, to destroy; Sufyoren, to listen; anerfennen, to acknowledge; fyetlen, to cure, to heal; fid) beffem, to improve (one's self) bicttren, to dictate; DergrSJ3ent, to increase, to enlarge; fcerfdjonera, to embellish; be}d)ieJ3crt, to bombard; fcernuniben, to wound; ttortegen, to submit (place before); cibteljncn, to decline; ciu§t>evfaufen, to sell out; fraitgoftfd), French; lmbegriinbet, unfounded; amertfcmifd), American; 105. fa ft, almost; grtebrtdj, Frederick; Defterrettf), Austria; ber ©ejanbte, the ambassador; ber ©raf, the count; ber Siirft, the prince; ber ^etbfyerr, the commander; *ber (Svfolg, the success; ber (golbcit, the soldier; ber §etb, the hero; ber oenat, the senate; bte 9Utfmerfjamfeit, the attention; bie 9?epltbttf, the republic; bte 2$unbe, the wound; bie $afy\, the number; bte 23ebhtgmtg, the condition; ber grtebett, the peace; ber ©efyitffe, the assistant; ber SBorratl), the stock, ber f5 ran S°f e r the Frenchman. Obs. — 1. The past participle of verbs that make their imperfects in te or ete is formed by prefixing the syllable ge (augment) and adding the ending t or et to the infinitive, after its ending (en or n) has been dropped. Yerbs in ben and ten take et: loben — gelobt; dnbern — cjednbert; reben — gerebet. Those verbs that change e into a in the imperfect (No. 95.) keep that vowel in the participle (feitbct — gefanbt; benfen — gebad)t, etc.). — n — v 2. Verbs with the ending irert (terett), and the inseparable compound verbs do not take an augment (ftubtretl, ftubtrt; erlattbett — erlailbt). Separable compounds insert the augment between the prefix and the simple verb (auf* l)5rett • — auf(] cl)ort). Some compound verbs consist of a separable prefix followed by an inseparable one. These take no augment: Uorberetten — D01> berettet. 3. About hundred and seventy verbs and their compounds form their past participles by the ending en, refusing the ending te of the imperfect (fefyett — gefeljeit; fatten- — gefatteu). These verbs are called strong verbs, and their conjugation strong conjugation; all the others (with participles in et) are called weak verbs, and their conjugation weak conjugation. See p. 90. 4. Nouns form their genitives in e3 (§) or ett (it). The former are of the strong, the latter of the weak declension. Nouns of the weak declension take ett (or tt if the nom. ends in e, el or er) in all cases except nora. sing., and never soften their radical vowels in the plural. To the weak declension be- long the masculines in e ($ttabe, SBote, ^reupe, etc.), and some other, especially foreign nouns which have dropped their former ending e (©raf, prft, £err, 2»enfd), §etb, @o0>at, .^rfiftbent, etc). 3Kcttt ©ruber fjat cm neueS §au$ in ber grtebrtdiSftrajse gebaut. 35er frangoftfdje @enera( fyat bett ©rafen ^BtSmartf nad) ber ©tabt SBerf attfeS begleitet. 3)?att fagt, baj} ber ©encrat Sft. bie Jotter eineS granjofett gefyeiratfyct ljabe. SBemt iljr ten gitrften eroartct fyattct, fo Ijatte er cud) tit fcht <2d)fo§ gefitljrt. £>aft bit bem gclbljerru ben Srfotg ber ©d)(ad)t angejetgt? !£ie ©olbaten Ijabctt bie t by aber: Qh$ ift ntd)t tneif}, fonbern fd)tt>ar3, ^ s ^ s not w hi* e oui black. — 13 — 6. The possessive case of nouns may generally be rendered by the Ger- man genitive preceding its noun. In this instance the governing noun, as in English, loses its article (the article or other determinative words, if there are any, always belonging to the possessive case) : the boy's father, b e8 It'll a b en $ater; the teacher s book, b e 3 2 e I) x e r 3 23ud). Qd) fotmrte, nm Mr ?u fag.cn, bap icf) morgen nad) meineS SJeffen Sanbgute abretfe. -3$ I)^& e meinen ©ebienten flefdjitft, urn mtr etn ^funb $iidzv gu faufen. Sir leben md)t, um gu effen, fouberu tt)ir effcn, um ju leben. Um gUicflidj jn fetn, mug man gnfrieben fetn. Um grennbe gu fyaben, mug man ntdjt blog aufrtdjttg, fouberu and) gefatfig fetn. $d) fyabe ntdjt 3«t au3$ugel)en. §mben ®fe bie ©tite, btefe jiuet -SBriefe abjufdjretben. SSotten (Sic fo gut fern bie £i)ure auf5umad)en? 3Ketne3 9?ad)bar3 @oljn Ijat $tt>ei ^ferbe ju toerfaufen. Q)t e3 nod) ntdjt ,3ett aufgnfieljen ? 3d) fjabe ba$ 2?ergnitgcn ge= t)abt, betncr Sdjmefter 93or(efung bet$Mt>ol)neu. §abcn @ie ©clb, um biefeu Sfttng gu faufen ? £at bein SBater bir btefe^ ©clb gegebcn, um e3 fo fd)(ed)t anjuroenben? 2>3 gfiirfien Sob Ijat mid) fefjr ate angeuefym itberrafdjt. Seiner ©djttefter gratnbin fyat utd)t untoor* ftd)ttg, fonbern fefyr tnetfe gcljanbclt. 3d) bin ntdjt f)ter, um cure Sntfd)u(bigungen anjuljorcn, fouberu iun bie Strafe, bie il)r Derbicnt Ijabt, ju bictiren. 108. My brother has six letters to cop}'. Have the kindness to send me back my book. It is time to depart. Which dress do you wish to put on? Allow me to open the window, it is so warm. Excuse me, it is not warm, but cold. You have the bad habit to rise too late; }'ou must not rise late, but as early as you can. A soldier has (is) arrived in order to take along the general's children. I have sent a servant to the hotel in order to call for my sister's trunk. In order to make progress (plur. in German), we must not play, but diligently work. We need more money in order to continue this business properly. In order to prepare [yourself] sufficiently, you will need not one but three hours. The Emperor Napoleon has declared war to the King of Prussia in order not to lose his crown. — 71 — 109. Present Infinitive Passive. gelobt tberben (gelobt £U roerben), to be praised. Present Indicative Passive : id) trjerbe gelobt, 1 am praised; bu roirft gelobt, thou art praised; er txrirb gelobt, he is praised; ttnr merbcit gelobt, we are praised; ifyr toerbet gelobt, you are praised; lie merben gelobt, they are praised. Passive Form with fettt : id) bin gelobt, I am praised; bu bift gelobt, thou art praised etc. Obs — 1. The present passive is easily distinguished from the future active, the auxiliary noerbett in the latter being connected with the infini- tive, and in the former with the past participle of the verb. 2. The passive with frerben is the ordinary form of the German passive, denoting the actual happening or continuing cf the action expressed by the verb : bie geittbe tt) e r b e tt oerfolgt, the enemy are pursued (are being pursued). The form of the passive with fetlt denotes a state, resulting from the action expressed by the verb: ba$ §cm$ i ft cerfauft, the house is sold (is a sold one), denoting the result of the act of selling, while: ba% $au§ tturb bermuft denotes the actual going on of the sale (the house is being sold, for instance by an auctioneer). If the action itself and its result are not distinguished, both forms may be used with equal propriety: bie t&iabt roirb (or ift) belagert, the city is besieged. If for the English ordinary passive we use or may use the progressive form of the passive, the German passive takes the auxiliary rcerbetu 3. The passive agent (doer of the action) is generally indicated by Don with the dative (sometimes by'burd)): bie ©tabt ttnrb b o tt bett £ru£pctt bela= gert, the city is besieged by the troops. 4. The conjunction when is translated by roetttt (not by at3), if it de- notes zvhenever, or if the verb stands in the present, perfect or future tenses. SYNOPSIS. roatttt ? in questions, direct or indirect; toemt, if denoting whenever or if the verb is in present, perfect or when - future; Cu% if the verb is in the imperfect or pluperfect, and does not denote whenever. •r j roettrt, denoting contingency in conditional clauses; ( ob, if denoting whether after verbs of asking or doubting. ^(ttfieliett, to appoint; befeften, to occupy; cmgreifett (part, angegriffen), to attack; betteibett, to envy; attSrtiftett, to endow; beleibtgen, to insult; cmf alien, to fill; blitfjen, to flourish; adjten, to esteem; ernten, to harvest; befofynen, to reward; er^eben (n. erfyoben), to collect; 75 — crftamtett (v. a.), to astonish; crfreuen, to delight; gebraud)en, to use; geUngen, to succeed Ijaffcn, to hate; lieben, to love; :|) (emir en, to grade; pffoftern, to pave; radjen, to avenge; repariren, to repair; jaen, to sow; ftrafen; to punish; taufcrjett, to deceive; *uma,eben, (strong v.) *umringcn *uberf)aufen, to overwhelm; *iibeqeugen, to convince; berlaffen (strong), to leave, quit, desert; Derfcfjltcgcn (pLtoerfrfjfoffen), to lock; oerforgett, to supply; *&otfenben, to finish; bte WtQObt, the tax; tie mintage, the talent; ber Sltltrag, the application; bte Arbeit, the work, labor; bte 2trt, the kind; ba3 2>ampfboot, the steamboat; bet* (§ijenba()n$UO,, the railroad-train; bte (Srbtttenmg, the animosity; to surround; ber gall, the case; ba3 ge(b (pi. getber), the field; ber grueling, the spring; ber ©ecmer, the adversary; ba3 ©etretbe, the grain; ber §ctnbet, the trade; ber §erbft, the autumn; ber $cmfer, the purchaser; ber Saben, th.e shop; ba3 £aubl)ait$, the villa; bte SebenSmtttet, (pi) the victuals; bas geljrbud), the text-book; ber $lcm, the plan; ber «PoIe, the Pole; bte s ^egeImdJ3tg!ett, the regularity; ber SRllffe, the Russian; ber ©ommer, the summer; ber Uljrmadjer, the watchmaker; ba$ SBerbtenft, the merit; ber 2£etngarten, the vineyard; gefdncft, able; frucfjtbar, fertile; reidjttd), abundant; fonberbar, odd; ltmniffenb, ignorant; fogletd), presently, directly, immed- iately; iibcraH, everywhere. Qti) toerbe Don inetnem SBatcr gctobt, toenn id) fleiptg bin. £)n toirft toon betnem Scfyrcr getabclt, we'd bu tmmer faul bift. £)er ge* fdjidte 2ftamt tturb gelobt unb ber umx>iffenbc getabclt. SBeldje ®na* ben toerben betofynt unb fteldie toerben geftraft? 3Mej[emgcn, tteldje flctfctg finb, toerben betofynt unb bte, toeldje faul fi:tb, geftraft. SBir tocrben t>on nnfern Sftcrn geltcbt; ii)r roerbet Don ben eurtgen geta- belt 3Rcmc 53riibcr toerben Don ^ebermamt gead)tct. 23ir toerben tion nnfern getnben geljajH. £>ie 9Ibgaben tocrben \ctgt rntt ber grd^ ten ^egeltna^tgfeit erl)oben. !Der Srtcg toirb mit grower Grbit* terung fortgefefct. ©enn itjr Don euern geinbert beletbtgt inerbet, ntiifct il)r eud) uidjt rad)en. SEtr babeu nnfer $au§ Dcrfaffen, toctl e3 jefet rcparirt ttnrb. SSenn ba$ ©etretbe gefaet toivb, ift e3 grueling; toenn e$ gecrntet toirb, ift c3 ©oramcr ober §erbft. $\t bic Zi)\\v Dcrfd){o[(en? 3d) tin crftaimt, baft ol)ncnt berlaffen ift @cin ,3hmncr ift mit bcu foubcrbarftcit @ad)en angefitCt Sr tobtete fetnen ®egner, nm ntdjt uon if)m getobtet ju toerbett. Unfere Stabt ift (ttnrb) t)on ben frnd)tbarften gelbern umgeben. £5it fannft ntdjt in bie @tabt fom* men, ba fie son ben geinben befefct ift (or uurb). 110. I am envied by my friends, but thy merits are acknowled- ged by all. The king is deceived by his servants*. The President is daily overwhelmed by applications of every kind. We are overwhelmed with work (plur. in German) which has been in our hands for a year. These books are no more read. What text-books are used in your school ? Are the Poles loved or hated by the Russians? Is your work finished? It is not yet finished, but it shall (fol(en) be finished presently. I am surprised that your father should have given (transl. has given) this permission. Are you not convinced that these plans will succeed ? The inhabitants say that they are abundantly supplied with victuals. How is the city of New York supplied with victuals? The railroad-trains and steam- boats convey (brtugen) them daily to the city. My watch is now repaired; the watchmaker has sent it back to me. My watch is now (being) repaired by the watchmaker. Is thy wound not healed yet ? The streets of our city are now being graded and paved. When the shops are filled with purchasers, (the) trade is flourishing. If that work cannot be continued by you, it must be finished by your brother. You are deserted by your friends because they are always insulted by you. "We are delighted that your diligence is now better rewarded than** it was formerly the case. Since you are occupied^ * 33ebtettte is a menial servant; Wiener comprises all kinds of servants. A servant of God, eitt & tie tf) t @0tte§. Otherwise $rted)t is used of the lowest kinds of servants, ** 5tt3, than, throws the following verb to the end of the clause. f To occupy is rendered by befekeit, if it means to take possession : but by befd)afttom, if it refers to work. with too many engagements (3(r&eit},we shall appoint another assistant. My brother is expected by his friends while he is expecting them. Our soldiers were obliged to attack the enemy (plur. ) in order not to be attacked by them. This man is endowed with the highest talents. The city is everywhere surrounded with villas and vineyards. 111. Imperfect Indicative Passive: \ij amrbe* gelobt, I was praised; bit nmrDeft gelobt, thou wast praised; er rourDe gelobt, he was praised; XOXX ttntrbeu gelobt, we were praised; ifyr untrbet gelobt, you were praised; fie UUtrben gelobt, they were praised. Present Subjunctive Passive : ii) tt)evbe (bu roevbeft, er roerbe etc.) gelobt. Imperfect Subjunctive Passive : id) VDiirbe (^bu tutirbeft, er ivjiirbe etc.) gelobt. Obs. — 1. The imperfect indicative passive is formed by the auxiliary trmrbe, the imperfect of the verb roerben, to become, whose subjunctive is roitrbe. The imperfect subjunctive passive is easily distinguished from the active conditional, the auxiliary noiirbe in the latter being construed with the infinitive, and in the former with the past participle of the verb. 2. Instead of the ordinary passive with njcrbert in these tenses and moods, a passive with \ e i tt is used under the same circumstances as in the present indicative (No. 110. Obs. 3): Imperfect Indicative: id) rear geltebt, I was loved; Present Subjunctive: id) fet geltebt (generally translated by the past tense); Imperfect Subjunctive: id) rocire geltebt. £er £aben roar gefd)loffert, the shop was closed, if it means that the shop was a closed one, as a result of its having been closed before. But: ber £aben W ur b e gejd)lcffert, if the act of closing is described (the shop was being closed). If the action itself and its resulting state are not distinguished, we generally use the auxiliary ttmrbe in the imperfect. 3. The u?e of the subjunctive passive is the same as that of the cor- responding active tenses .(No. 99. 101.) 2Ibf)cmert (strong verb), to cut down; bebecfert, to cover; abtragen (strong), to pull down; bebrofyen, to threaten; cutreben, to address; bebaubeln, to treat; aufi)atteu (strong), to delay; belcifttgett, to molest; bebauervt, to regret; bertd)ten, to report; * In higher style the form id) ro a r b is used instead of id) ftmrbe, in the singular. beftegen, to defeat; beumnberrt, to admire; emtaben (strong), to invite; entbecfett, to discover; entdljren, to support; enuetfen (part, ernriefen), to prove; fortraumen, to remove, qudlen, to torment; fd)tiegeit (part. gefcf)Xoffeu), to close; ftoren, to disturb; troften, to console; *unterrid)teit, to instruct; fceridumbett, to slander; benrnettyen, to rent; t>Gvfel)cn (strong), to provide; DeruvtfjeUen, to condemn; Dcrmalten, to administer; uneber aufbemen, to rebuild; ber 2lbt>0CClt (weak deel.), tEo lawyer; ber Sfoujriff, the attack; ba% 2luge, the eye; ber 5lnget'(agte, the accused; ber 33al)ttf)of, the railroad station; ber Pettier, the beggar; bie 23e(agerung, the siege; ber Cngentfyiimer, the owner; ba$ (Sinlommen, the income; bie ©tnualjme, the revenue; ber ©aft, the guest; ber ©efemgene, the prisoner; ba% §inbermJ3, the obstacle; bie $anonabe, the cannonade; bie £eute (pi ), the individuals; ber 3ftarfd), the march; bie Cartel, the party; ber dauber, the robber; ber 9ttcf)ter, the judge; ba% ©d)teferbad), the slate-roof; bie ©tf)inbel, the shingle; ba$ ©djiff, the ship; bie @d)ulb, the guilt, the debt; ber ©eerduber, the pirate; bie ©pradje, the language; ba$ SBerbredjett, the crime; ber SBltttbrirgt, the surgeon; betrdcf)ttt(f) f considerable; beutfd), German; bitnfet, dark; frol), glad; leer, empty; prddjttg, magnificent; fdjredltdj, terrible; bort, there; nid)t euimal, not even. Qn wddjem -3al)re unb Don toem nntrbe 3Imertfa entbedt? SS?er Wax ber 9ft(nm, Don bem bit Ijeute in ber £>anuitonftra£e angercbet tourbeft ? $LU id) nad) SBien reifte, nmrbe id) liberal! Don 23ett(ent betaftigt. Safyrenb bit Don betnen greunben bettmnbert nnirbeft, ttmrbett \viv Don unfent geinben Derlanmbet. 3d) tear erftatmi, ba£ ttur nod) mdjts Don bir getjort fatten. £ie §aufer bicfer (Stabt toaxm bamaU mit Sdjinbcln bebeeft; je^t finbet ntan bort nnr ©d)ic- ferbadjer. DJiein grennb geigte mir an, baj3 feine SSJnnbe nod) ntd)t geljettt fci; er fitgte fyinjn, baj} cr Don feinem SSimbargte fcl)r (Diet) geqnaft roerbe. SRetne 33ritber in Berlin tfjeitten mir mit, ka$ fie faft taglid) Don beinen grennben eingefaben toftrbat, SBerat id) Don nteinen geinben geljafct toitrbe, fo ttmrbe id) fie nidjt fyaffen, fonbern Kebett. SSenn id) Don meinen grennben Dertaffen Wave, fonnte id) mid) nid)t Ieid)t troften. Qd) ttiirbe fefjr fro^ fein, toemt biefe — 19 — £>inbermffe fortgeraimtt ttiirben. 9U3 biefer 33rtef gefd^rieben ttmrbe, warm bte 2lugen, bte ifytt lefen fotlten (were to), fcfjon gefd)Ioffen* £)cr Slngeflagte rourbe Don ben 9itd)tent Dentrtfyeilt, rueit ba$ 9?et> brecben erunefen ttmr, mtb feme ©cfyulb nidjt bejttmfeU* toerben fonnte. 112. The Russians were defeated by the English in the battle of (bet) Inkerman. The city was threatened with a siege, but the threat was treated with contempt by the inhabitants**. The city was threatened with a siege [ever] since the third of March. In what year wast thou sent to Germany by thy friends ? The prisoners were defended by able lawyers. In what battle were you wounded ? When I departed from the city, I was accompanied by my friends to the railroad station. I was astonished when I heard that my friend Charles was not invited. When we were sailing (reifen) to Europe, our ship was pursued by a pirate. While you were instructed by Mr. Reiley, I was studying Ahn's Grammar of the German Language. We were obliged to quit our house because it was repaired. At that time all hotels of the city were filled with guests, but now they are empty. When it was dark, a terrible cannonade was opened (eroffnen) by the enemy. Was thy wound healed or not when thou wast returning to the city ? It was not healed then, but it was treated by the surgeon. The general reported that his march was being delayed by attacks of the enemy. My friend declared that he was abundantly provided with money. He said that he was daily molested by individuals who were disturbing him in his work. If my debts were paid (bejatjtcn), my income would be sufficient to support me. I would regret very much if these beautiful trees were cut down. Were your streets at that time in good condition (ber ©tcmb) ? No, they were not even paved; but they are being paved now. If your * In the passive to doubt must be translated by bc^tneifefrt, not by gmctfeln. ** All those adjuncts of the verb which complete its idea, must be placed after the passive agent. — 80 — house were rented, your revenues would increase (themselves) considerably. Would we pay fewer taxes, if our city were [being] administered by your party? If you were attacked by robbers, would you defend yourself or not? The house was pulled down by the owner in order to be rebuilt more magnificently. 113. Perfect Indicative Passive: id) bin gelobt toorben, I have been praised; bit bift gelobt toorben, thou hast been praised; er tft gelobt roorben, he has been praised; Voir finb Cjefobt toorben, we have been praised; tf)t feib gelobt roorben, you have been praised; fie finb gelobt roorben, they have been praised. Perfect Subjunctive Passive: id) jet gelobt roorben, bVL f e i ft (er fet, toil* feien, etc.) gelobt toorben. Pluperfect Indicat. Passive: id) roar gelobt roorben, I had been praised; bn roarft gelobt toorben, thou hadst been praised; er roar gelobt roorben, he had been praised; Voir toaren gelobt toorben, we had been praised; il)V roaret gelobt roorben, you had been praised; fie roaren gelobt toorben, they had been praised. Pluperfect Subjunct. Passive: id) tuctre gelobt roorben, bit rocireft (er rocire, etc.) gelobt roorben. Obs. — 1. The perfect and pluperfect passive are formed by the perfect (id) bin roorben) and the pluperfect (id) roar roorben) of toerbenf (to become), in connection with the past participle of the verb. 2. The rules No 99, Obs. 5 and 6, as to the use of the subjunctive and its tense after verbs of believing, stating, etc., n re Applicable to the passive voice, the same as to the active: er glaiibte, bafj id) in bcr (£>d)lad)t Oer* tounbet toorben fet ober to a r e , ho believed that I had been wounded in battle. 3. The pluperfect subjunctive is often used in hypothetical periods with the force of the english potential with shoidd (would) hive (or should^ would have been m the passive): See No. 101 , Obs. 2 : id) 1) d 1 1 e il)tt g e f e I) e n; f The verb roerben, if not an auxiliary, takes the augment in the parti- ciple: id) bin g e roorben, I have become; td) toar g e toorben, I had become. — 81 — I should have seen liiin; er tv'&Xt tton mit g e f C I) C It to r b e n , he would have been seen by me. 4. In ordinary sentences the perfect is frequently used, in German, when in English only the simple past tense would be proper; id) bin geftem in ber @tabt g e ft) e \ e n , I was yesterday in town. 5, The conjunction after is translated by the German conjunction xiady bent, and the conjunction before by el)e, bettor. All these require the verb to be placed at the end of the clause: n a d) b e nt id) il)n geljortfyatte, after I had heard him; nadjbemergetobtet to or be n to a r ,t after he had been killed; efye (bettor) er cmgefangett Ijatte, before he had commenced. SInSfitfjren, to execute; bte iBiirgfcfyaft, the bail, ( to give benad)rid)ttgen, to inform; bail, SBurgjdjaft tetften); befetttgeit, to remove; bte (Entjd)abtgung(sing.), the damages; corrtgtren, to correct; ba3 gener, the fire; entlaffen (strong v.), to dismiss; ber £(ager, the plaintiff; entmutrjtgen, to discourage; bte 9ftiif)e, the trouble; pflegen, to nurse; ber $ro$eJ3, the law-suit; protefttren, to protest; bte ^rajibentfdjaft, the presidency; *iiberfenben, to send over; ber Stfatfygeber, the adviser; *tibertragen (strong), to confer (upon); bte (SteUe, the place; tterfyaften, to arrest; ber Xefegrapl) (weak d.),the telegraph; tterlattgett, to demand; bte 2Saf)(, the election; tterratfyen (strong), to betray; ber 2Bed)fet, the note (bill of exchange) ; ttorlaben (strong), to summon; ber ^oEbeamte, the custom-house tDarnett, to warn; officer; SSfabreaS, Andrew; at(anttjd), Atlantic; ber $uftrag, the order; ttergeMtd), in vain; bte 23anf, the bank; gtt)eife(^aft, doubtful. Qfy bin t>on meinem Secret cjeftraft toorbett, mil id) btefe 2Iufga= ben abgefdjrieben f)abc. tefe 9?ad)rid)t ift un8 t)on £>errn 2Rofl mitgetl)ei(t trjorben. SBon mem ift biefe Stufgabe corrtgtrt toorben ? S3 ift mtr gefagt toorben, ba£ @ie emeu ©ebicntcn furfjcn. £)tefe $lad)xid)t ift un3 bnrd) (by) bm atfanttfdjen Xelegrapljen iibevfanbt toorben. SDtefeS ©elb ift mtr gcjaljft ftorben, nadjbcm id) e£ gtoctmal fcergeb(id) Dcrlangt fyatte. Sftadjbem ber ^rafibent Sincoln getdbtet ttorben wax, f In such passive constructions the participle toorben is sometimes omitted: nad)bem ergetobtet mar. mnrbe bie ^rcifibentfdjaft StnbreaS $ot)ufon iibertragcn. SSer pflegte end), ati i()r in ber ©d)tad)t Dcrmnnbct morbcn mart? £art be* tymptttt, bap biefe 91ad)rid)t if)m Don fetnen grcunbeu nod) nidjt mtt^ get()ei(t morben fci Unfere ^(cinc fonnten nidjt auSgefufyrt merben, nadjbent fie unfern ©egnern Derratfyen morbcn maren. 3#cine grennbe gtanbten, ba§ id) in ber2d)lad)t getbbtet morben fet. £)te geinbe Der<- mut()ctcn ba^ mir bnrd) (by) unfere 3?iebcr(age cntmnt(;igt morben maren. SSarnm antmortet ifyr, cl)e iljr Don enrcm Sefjrcr gcfragt morben feib ? !Die geinbe flofjcrt (fled), bcDor [nod)] ba3 gcncr Don tutS croffnet (opened) morben mar. 2£enu bit meinen 9iat() bcfolgt fyatteft, mar ft bit nidjt t)on beincm ©egncr bet (at) bcr 2£>al)t be- ficgt morbcn. SMefer l?orfd)lag mare Don inir nid)t angenomnten (accepted) morben, menn id) nid)t Don meinen 3iatf)geberu gctdnfd)t morben mare. 114. I have been informed that you have opened ^eroffnet) a school in the city of Xew York. This debt has never been paid. Almost all custom-house officers have been dismissed by the President. Your note has been protested by the bank. After your cousin had been arrested, I was summoned by the judge in order to give bail for him. We continued our journey after these obstacles had been removed. William paid me a visit, before I had been informed that he was here. Before your orders had been executed, we heard that (the) war had been declared. Your brother stated in his letter that he had lost his law-suit and was condemned to pay damages to the plaintiff. It is doubtful whether I would have found bail, if I had been arrested. If I had been in your place, I should not have been defeated by my adversary. If you had had better advisers, you would have been warned by them. — 83 — 115. jld) fveiten, to rejoice, to be glad. tdj freue mid), I rejoice, I am glad; id] f)abe mid) fjefteitt^ I have rejoiced; I have been glad, etc.; bu freujl bid), thou art glad, etc.; bu I) a ft bid) gefreut, cr freut fid), cr l)tit fid] gefreut, uur f veuen un0, tott l)aben une gefreut, tiir freut eud), Hjt tiabt eudi gefreut, fie freueix fid), fie Ijabeit ftd) gefreut. Obs.— 1. A. great number of German reflexive verbs (construed with a reflexive pronoun) correspond to English neuter or passive verbs or to whole phrases: [idj ttetbreitett, to spread] fid) tauidjen, to be disappointed: fief) feftert, to fcife a seat. The reflexive pronouns (unless governed by preposi- tions) are generally, bat not always in the accusative, In fid) fd)meid)eht, to flatter one's self, fid) etubilben, (o imagine, and several others the reflexive pronouns are datives: id) fd)metd)le mir, etc. 2, The English compounds with sejf (myself, thyself, himself, etc.), are not to be considered as reflexives if they qualify nouns or pronouns with emphatical force. In this ease they are rendered by the German indeclinable felbft (or felbet): 3d) fyabe ben 2ft a rut felbft geiebcu, I have seen the man himself; e V f c i b ft fagte ec> he said so himself; \ d) irjerbe f c I b ft gel)Ctt, /shall go myself. 3, If the English compounds with self have both a reflexive and emphat- ical force (which always is the case when reflexives have the rhetorical accent), they are rendered by the German reflexives in connection with felbft: He has killed himself (and no other), er l)at fid) f C 1 b f t getobtet: you must not praise yourselves (but others' you may), iljr miifjt cud) ntdit f e [ b f t loben. 4, The English reciprocals each o'her, one another are either translated by the indeclinable einanber, or, if no ambiguity can arise, by the reflexive pronouns either alone, or in combination with etuaubcv: fie fdjirrtpfcit fid), they abuse each other: nur bctffeu etna it bet, we hate each other; fie ftoreit j i d) etrtdttber, they disturb each other. Often German reciprocal verbs are ix.= pressei by neuter verbs in English: 1 1 d) tveffen, to meet (one another); ft d) (mit etnattberi imterljalteit, to converse. 2lbgeben (abgegangen), t cleave (neuter fid) begegrtert, to meet; verb); beicMDigeit, to damage; fid) amiiftven, to enjoy one's self; fid) biicfett, to stoop down; atldeilten, to intimate; baitleit ''with dative), to thank; a:if;):be:i (auftjerjoben), to pick up; fiii erinnertt (with gen.), to remember; ftjf) aufl)atteu (strong), to stay: fid) erhntMgeu, to inquire; auSbrennen, to burn out; fufj erfaiteu, to take a cold; fid) befiuben (befunben), to do, to be fid) ergeben (strong), to surrender (of the health) ; (one' s self) ; — 84 — fid) ctnbttben, to imagine; ftd) fitgen, to submit; gct)ord)en (with dative), to obey; fatten (strong), to keep; Ijerausfovbcrn, to challenge; ftd) nftfjrot, to approach; regie vert, to govern; fid) [e£en, to take a seat; treffen (getrbffen), to hit; ftd) tvenneit (to separate (from one another) ; *ftd) Uitterfjatteit (strong), to converse; *imterrtd)ten, to instruct; *unterfttii3ert, to support; ftd} uerbeugen, to bow (down); &erpf(td)tert, to pledge; toerfennett, to misjudge; ftd) uerjammeln, to assemble; ttcntrfadjen, to cause; fcenutdcht, to implicate; *ftd) Wtberfcfeen (with dative), to op- pose, to resist; ttneberjel)ert (strong), to see again; ftd) rounbern, to wonder; aiirjlen, to number; gugebett (.strong), to concede; bte 2tuforbenmg, the demand; bte SCuovbtmrtg, the regulation; ber 2ttt]prud), the claim; ber ^rgroorjtt, the suspicion; bcr $il8fd)Ug, the board; ber 23camte, the officer; ba3 ©elbftiicf, the piece of money; ba% ©eje£, the law; ber £ummet, Heaven; bte $aitoneufugel, the cannon ball; ba3 Sftirgtieb (plur. 2Bitgtteber), the member; bte Cbrtgteit, the authorities; ber Sd)abcn, the damage; bte @i£tmg, the session, meeting; bie Utttentcijmwtg, the enterprise; ber &orftt3ertbc, the chairman; bte 3n ftttnmung, the approbation, con- sent; ciinjerft, extreme; betannt, known (as adj.); beutfid), distinct; gered)t,just; fieb, dear; me^rcre, several; miibe, tired; ftrenge, severe; tbbtttd), fatal; twtfjiy well; ma 3 mad) en ©ft, how is your health f 9Ib}d)teb nefjmen, to take leave; ftd) (dat.) SBerocguttg (fem.) mad)ert, to take exercise; SBeifcitC ftnben, to meet with favor. ®nten Xag, lieber 3peinrid), $d) freuc mid), bid) toteberjufeljert. SSie befinbeft bit bid) ? Qd) befinbe mid) fefyr ft>of)l, feit id) in SRete 9)orf ttofyne. 9Sa$ mad)t beta 33rubcr ? Q\t er h)ol)( ? Qa, er b& ftnbct fid) fefjr too^t 2Sa3 tljuft bu, gubtmg ? 3d) fleibe mid) an. Sleibet if)r end) nod) nidjt an? 2Bir toerben nn3 fpater anfleiben. 211$ bie SERttglteber be3 2lu8fd)uffes fid) oerfammett fatten, tonrbe ba$ ^3rotofotl (the minutes) ber le^ten ©i^nng t)om SBorfifcenbeit Deric* fen.f Sir biidten nn3 afte, nm nicfjt Don ben $anonenfngeln getrof* fen jn toerben. 2Sarnm (jaft bit bid) nidjt erfttnbigt, wann ber (Stmt* f To read, lefen, ttoriefert, abfefen f t>ertefen. Tbe simple verb teien de- notes reading in general; the compounds denote to read aloud. In the sentence above the simple verb would be improper. — 8o — bating nbgcl)t? Sir Ijahm nn$ nod) mentals ben Sfaorbmutgcit bev Obrigfcit rDiberfetjt* Sir ertnncr-n wis bicjcS 2ftannc3 fetjr bcuttid). Grinncrt Ujr cud) uid)t, ba£ U)t cud) Dcrpflidjtet tjattct, ben ©cfefcen ju gd)ord)cu? Sir tjabcn fclbft nidjt gegtaubt, ba£ bie 2Kitgtieber fid) bicfcn Stnforbernngen fitgen nntrbcn. Sir frenten m», ate ftrir Ijorten, bap Sic fclbft ttujcre 2(nfprud)C nntcrftiifccn fciirben* ©cut SSater fclbft tft in bicfe 9tnge(egent)eit aenmifrit toorbcn. $f)r miitft fclbft ancrfcnnen, bap mciuc Slutragc gcrcd)t fink §ctft cud) fclbft, bann (then) nnrb bcr fnmutet cud) tjctfcu. £)n toerortljciift bid) fclbft, incnu bit bieS jugtbft. Saun ftcrbcu Wit vm$ ttricbcrfcljcn? @3 tt)ar nidjt bcfamtt, bap bicfe |>erren fid) fd)on Icnneu. £ie ^8fe ncr ud[)crtcu fid) cinanbcr ol)ne slrgrooljn. &ar( nub SiU)c(m fud)cu fid) cinanbcr [fd)on] feit (auger (for more) ate cincr Stunbc. Sari unb id) begegncten un$ gcftcnt breimal in bcr Strafe 9M)tnt jctjt S(bfd)icb Don cinanbcr, licbe Sinber, il)r mit^i cud) trennen; iljr Ijabt leine £c\t ntcfjr, end) nut cinanbcr ju unterfyattcn. $d) gfanbe, bap lDir nn$ cinanbcr fcerfannt fyaben ; ttnr tootten fiinftig (for the future) gutegrcunbe fcin. 116. Were you not extremely glad when you heard that this war had been finished (bccnben) ? I have staid here for more than three months. How did you enjoy yourself in my brother's company? The enemy did not oppose the march of our army. Doest thou not remember my older brother ? Re- member, my son, that our days are numbered! How do you do, Charles? I am not very well, I have taken a cold. I do not wonder; you take too little exercise. I bowed, when I recognized the President. The ambassador bowed, in order to intimate his approbation. Why doest thou stoop down? In order to pick up a small piece of money that I have lost. I imagined that my enterprise would meet with more favor; but I was mistaken. Why do you not take a seat? You must be tired. I thank you, I cannot stay [any] longer. What damage has been caused by this lire ? Several rooms are burned out, but the house itself has not been damaged much. Have you not conceded yourself that this city must — 86 — surrender soon and cannot keep (itself) much longer? Have jo u heard this of the President or of one of his officers f ? I have seen myself that the accused has beaten the boy. Who has instructed your brother ? Nobody, he has instructed himself. You must never be more severe with others than with yourself. Those that cannot govern others, cannot govern themselves. Will you not sent a servant in order to buy these things ? No, it is better that I go myself Po you know if these peoplej know each other? The two soldiers wounded each other; but their wounds were not fatal. We have met to-day, but did not recognize one another. Do you know that two members of the Senate have challenged each other ? Mr. Nollet and I have conversed (for) two hours (with each other). 117. 1. (§§ regttet, it rains; e$ fdjtteit (fdjneet), it snows; e§ friert, it freezes; e$ blt^t, it lightens; e§ bottttert, it thunders; e§ tagt, the day breaks; e§ flopft, sotnbody knocks; e§ lautet, the bell rings; e$ tft fait, it is cold; e§ ttrirb fait, it begins to be (is getting) cold. cold; 2. id} f rtere or e§ friert id) fdmnfce „ e3 fd)ttri£t td) fyungere, id) bin fyimgrtg, fyabe §>mtget — ,, e3 fjmtgert id) burfte, id) bin burftkj, l)abe 2)urft ,, eSburftet id) bin roam - mtd), I am perspiring; hungry; thirsty; warm. 3. 2Ba§ tft 3>f)nen ? what ails you, what is the matter with you ? SSie ift Sfynen ? how do you feel ? (S3 tft mtr cs nnrb mtr r fait, warm, tool)!, unrool)!, | itb el, I jcr)rutrtbltg f I feel I begin to feel cold; warm; well; unwell; sick in my stomach; . giddy. @3 tft mtr, CttS Ob . . (with subjunctive), I feel (it seems to me) as if .... . e§ fommt mir cor, j J«| j ; ; (with subj) , it appears (seems) to me } *f f ; ; f Officer is translated by $3eamte, if a civil officer is meant; an officer of the army is translated by £)fftcier* J This people, btefe§ SBolf; these peoples, btefe Poller; these people (individuals), btefe £eute. — 87 — e$ cirgert mid), e§ efelt mid), e3 oerbriegt mid) (part. oerbroffen), e§ rounbert mid) (id) rounbre mid)), e3 frcut mid), e$ ift mir lieb (id) frcue mid)), e3 betriibt mid), es tfyut mir left), eg fcfftttergt mid), baft, . .lam (menu) . . . angry, displeased, disgusted, vexed, irritated, astonished, glad, pleased, grieved, sorry, that, (if) 5. id) argere mid), id) bin cirqerlid), id) efie mid), I metf, {baft) id) bin tterbriegttd), ' I feel (am) id) bin betriibt, id) bin | traurtg, J angry, displeased, disgusted, vexed, irritated, grieved, sorry, sad, J * because . Obr — 1. The number of impersonal expressions is considerably larger in German than in English. Almost every German sentence, not having a mere personal pronoun for a subject, may be cast into an impersonal form, in which case the subject may be placed after the verb: e§ rollt ber Conner, the thunder rolls; e§ tt>ar bie3 ein neuer 23ewei3, baft. . this was a new proof, that. . The impersonal form is generally preferred if indefinite substantives are the subjects: e3 flopft Semanb, somebody knocks; cS ift 9?temanb ba, nobody is there; e$ ift cut geuer audgebrodjen, a fire has broken out. 2. Those impersonal expressions that are construed with an accusative or dative (enumerated No 2, 3, and 4) frequently begin with their accusatives or datives in which instance the impersonal e§ is generally dropped: mid) friert, I am cold; mid) burftet, I am thirsty; mir ift unrt>oI)l, I feel unwell. Those impersonals enumerated No. 4 always drop the e3, if the dependent clause (with baft or menn) is placed at the beginning of the sentence; other- wise the eg is more generally retained: mir tfjttt (eS) leib, bag etc., I am sorry that etc; but: bag &it nidjt fommeu, tfjut mir leib, I am sorry that you do not come. Those expressions enumerated No, 1 never drop the eg. Huofefyen (bu ftefyj! au§), to look (with a clause or with an adjective); bet)errfd)en, to rule over; bredjen (part, gebrocfyen), to break; beta, to bark; gel)en (gegangen), to walk, to step; Ijetgen, to warm (heat) the rooms, build a fire (in the stove); l)errfd)en, to rule, to prevail; lanfen (strong v.), to run; mttbrtngen, to bring along; Dftdtlj leib en, to suffer; retd)en, to hand; Derfdumen (strong), to miss; tierftefyen, to understand; t)oriiberger)eu (strong), to pass; mdrmen, to warm (a person); bie (El)re, the honor; — 88 — ba% @ettritter, the thunder-storm; ba3 33erfyred)ett, the promise; ber £'opfjd)mer$ (pi. bie $opf{d)mer$en), bie Urjadje, the cause; the headache; ber 2Beftrohtb, the west-wind; bie §cm$tl)ur, the street-door; bunM, dark; bie $ranff)ett, the sickness; - geroofynlid), ordinary, common; bie -ftadfyt, the night; ^erjlt^, sincere; ber @clat)e, the slave; nag, wet; bie ©tdjerfyeit, the safety; untreu, faithless; ba§ ©djneemetter, the snow-storm; burdjauS ntdjt, not at all; bie @umme, the sum; fcteUetd)t, perhaps; (ba%) S^cmroetter, a thaw; I)eute (2Xbenb), fyeute (-Kacfjt), to-night; ba§ $atertanb, one's own country, emft, ) , • ; fatherland; eternal, \ °™* (up ° n a tlme )' (£§ tft jd)ted)te§ ^Setter, there is a storm; it is bad weather. (58 tft Dftttrinb, the wind is east. 2)ie ©efcfycifte fleljen fd)fed)t, business is dull. (£3 betrtfft (past. part, betroffen) tnidt) (mid) betvifft) cut UttfatC (m.) I meet with an accident. SRegnet e3? (§3 regnet nod) ntdjt, aber c$ toirb fogtctd) anfangen ju regtten. ©3 tjat bie ganje 9?ad)t gefdjttett 2Bir roerben morgeu ©djneetoetter Ijaben. (S3 ftrirb fait, ttrir mitffen balb eintjeijen. 23trb e$ morgen frieren ? SKettt, e3 tirirb Xfyauroetter fetn. $aben @te fid) [fcfyon] gewarmt? 9?ein, id) braudje mid) nid)t ju barmen; e3 tft mir burd)au$ nief)t fait. 2Ga3 tft Mr, $arl? ©a fidjft bla§ auS. (S« ift mir nur ein toenig itbel; e$ tturb balb fcoritbergefyen. Sie tft bir \t%t? Wxx toirb beffer, id) fyabe nur [nod)] ein toenig ^opffdjmerjen. @S fd^eint, ba£ c$ Qljncn fdjnnnblig tft 9^ein r id) totlt Qi)\m\ offen geftefjcn, ba§ id) hunger l)abe. ©urftct cud), Stnber? ©* tfjut mir teib, ba£ fein SESaffcr in tmferm §aufe tft SSie fietjft bu au$, £)ein= rid)? bu fcEjwi^eft; bu fyaft gettnp (I suppose) ju ftarf (much) ge-* laufen? S3 tear mir, aU ob id) eiuett £>unb bellen Ijorte, unb id) Ijorte nid)t auf ju laufen, bis id) in ©idjerljeit toax. 3Sa3 (at what) Derbrtefct bid)? 3$ bin argerttd), tr»et£ id) Ijeute gtt>eimal in meincr Slrbeit geftort ttorben bin. (§3 l)at mid) nie mefyr gefjungert, al3 geftern. 2ttid) burftet fefjr, SDiutter, id) mod)tc (No. 101, Obs. 3) cin ®la$ SEBaffcr Ijaben. JSenn iljr Ijurtgrtg iuaret, nmrbet il)r cuer 33rot gegeffcn Ijabctt. S3 Humbert mid) burdjauS nid)t, bap @ie bie3 nid)t fcerfteijen. gricbric^ ber ©ro^e fagte, bafe cS il)tt efele, (SclaDcn ju befjerrf^eu. (£* argert mid^, ba§ id) geftern bie 23or(efung t)ci^ — 89 — faumPfyabe. $reut e$ ©ie &tefleid)t, ba£ Qtyt greunbe $to$ teibctt mitffen? 9ietn, e$ tfyut mir fyerjticf) letb, aber id) fann Ujnen nitf)t Ijetfeit; idj fjabe nidjte, wa8 id) ifjneit geben Wnnte. (S3 mar unS auperft fteb, baj3 ifyr papier unb gebern mitgebradjt fyattet. 3$ bin be- tritbt, met! icf> meinen ^rojeft tiertoren ljabe. SBarum bift bit traurig? 28eit bic ©efdjafte fd)Ied)t geljen. £>a£ ^fjre grau Gutter ntdjt (anger bet un3 bletben fann, tt)itt m$ fetjr fetb (to be transposed in English), ©aft betnen SSater em fo grower Unfatt bctroffcn Ijat, be* trilbt mid) fe^r. JBitrbe e$ eud) nidjt fdjmerjert, menu enre ©iJljne iljrem 23atertanbe nntreit triiren ? Sommt e3 bir nidjt Dor, ate ob e3 geHo^ft ^atte ? 3ft betn ©ruber ffeifig? gr ift feljr ffei^tg; e3 fann 3?temanb flctpiger fetn, ate er. (£8 fterben je£t mefyr Sftenfdjen, ate getttofyntid); n>a8 ift bie Urfadje? (£3 Ijerrfdjen je^t mefyr ®ranfc Ijeiten ate efyemate. 118. Is it going to rain ? No, it will snow. Will there be a storm to-night ? I believe not, the wind is west. Are you afraidf when it lightens and thunders? No, I am not afraid of (Dor with a dative) a thunder-storm. Our journey wasj not finished till the day broke (anbredjen). It will soon begin to be dark; you must lock the street-door, John. It begins to storm, Charles; we must run if we do not want (rootten) to be thorougly (burd) unb burd)) wet. Why do the bells ring ? There must be a fire in the city. I should be very sorry, if that were the case. I am very hungry, let me have (gib mir) a piece of bread. You will be thirsty if you take (effen) too much salt. Do you (already) heat your rooms? It has not been cold enough (in order) to heat [them], but we shall build a fire to-night. Do you feel un- well, Charles ? It appears to me as if you looked sick. You are right, I have taken a cold. Ifthisisso, you must walk into the room, and warm yourself. No, I thank you, I cannot stay; 1 feel too warm already. I begin to feel unwell, will (molten) you have the kindness to hand me a glass of water ? f I am afraid, followed by that is translated by id) fiird)te; also, if fiirdjteit is followed by an accusative. But the neuter verb to be afraid is rendered by fid) fitrdjten. % SBuvbe or wax ? — 90 — What ails you to-day ? You look as if you had met with an accident. I have (impersonally) met with no accident; butf I feel angry because I have missed the railroad train. I felt vexed because Charles had broken his promise. What is the matter with your friend ? He feels sorry because he has lost a large sum of money. I am pleased [to hear] that you are well again. I was glad that William had not followed your advice. Nobody has wished yet (to be expressed impersonally) that he should have acted badly (translate: to have acted badly). My friend writes me (impersonally) that he is expect- ing you. Once upon a time lived a great man (impersonally) who owned (feefa|) large palaces (®d)(of;No. 55) and gardens. 119. Infinitive. treffen, to hit. Past Participle. getroffen. Present Indicative. id) treffe, bu trtffft, er triff t, rotr treffen, ifjr trefft, fte treffen. Present Subjunctive, id) treffe, bu treffeft, er treffe, etc. Imperfect Indicative, id) traf, bit traf ft, er traf, nrir trafen, Ujr traft, fte trafen. Imperf. Subjunctive, id) trcife, bu traf eft, er trcife, ttur trafen, ifyr trafet, fte trafen. Imperative. trtff, trefft. Obs. — 1. The strong verbs, a list} of which is attached to the Second Part have the following peculiarities: a) The first pers. imperf.' indie, takes no ending, hut changes the radi- cal vowel. The past participle retains either the vowel of the infinitive, or takes that of the imperfect, or a vowel different from both: fdjlagen, fd)iug, gestagen; fedjten, fod)t, gefod)ten; fterbeu, ftarb, geftorben. b) The imperf. subj. adds the ending e to its indicative, softening the radicals a, o, it into a, 5, it. c) Most strong verbs with the radicals a and soften these vowels in the second and third pers. indicative (id) fd)lage, bu fd)(agft, er fdjla'gt); and most of those with the radical e change this vowel into i in the same persons, and in the singular ofthe imperative, dropping at the same time their final e in the latter mood, some of them doubling the final consonant: geben, gt6; nerjmen, nimm. Some other strong verbs (for instance faff en, tag), drop like- wise the final e of the imperative. If strong verbs with any of these radicals f 2lber or fonbern ? Does I feel angry? correct the previous clause ? J The student should look for every strong verb in the list before at- tempting to use it. Since none of the many compounds of strong verbs are given in the list, the mode of their conjugation must be ascertained by look- ing for the corresponding simple verbs. — 91 end in ben or ten (ttjett), they drop the e of their endings in the second and third pers. pres. indie, those in ten and tfyen generally dropping also the t of the ending in the third pers.: ratljen, vdtfjft, rati); tretett, trtttft, tritt. d) Of irregular formation are: tfynn, tfyat, getfjan; gefyen, ging, gegangen; ftefyen, ftanb, geftanben. 2. Several German verbs governing an infinitive without ^n, are to- gether with their infinitives rendered by single verbs or various phrases. Such verbs are: jpa$teren gefyen, to take a walk; ftefyen bteiben, to stop; fallen laffett, to drop; fennen ternen, to become acquainted with. Only the last of these infinitives (being the governing verbs) are conjugated, and must in the simple tenses of ordinary sentences precede their dependent infinitives : id) gdje fjjagterot, id) blteb fteljen, etc. 5lnnef)men, to accept, to take; auffdjrcibeu, to write down; befel)(en, to command; bitten, to request, to beg; befcutfdjen, to watch; etnnel)men, to occupy, to carry; fid) erfdjrecfen, to be frightened, to be scared; fltefyen, to flee; geften, to be esteemed, to be worth; etmct3 gelten, to be for something; fafyren, to ride (on a vehicle); nad)geben (with dat.), to yield; rati) e It, to advise; ftatt ftnben, to take place; fterben, to die; ftfjtafen, to sleep; fd)etncn, to shine; fcergeffen, to forget; bcr Gig en tfj timer, the owner; bie greifyeit, the liberty; ba$ ©cbtrgc, the mountain-chain; bie ©efangennatnne, the capture; bie ©eroaft, the force; ber GHaubtger, the creditor; bte ^offnmtg, the hope; bte QEtajjifer, the classics; bte Crbnnng, the order; ber better, the horseman; bie Speije, the food; bte ©tdrfe, the strength; bte ^tellung, the position; ber Seller, the plate; bte Sntppcn, the troops; bte llnorbnung, the disorder; bte Unterljnftmtg, the conversation; bte $erjd)an$ung, the intrenchment; bte 3>evfpred)itng, the promise; fid) Dergletcfjen, to make a compromise; *ba§ iBerfangen, the demand; fcerratfyen, to betray; t>erfdjrt>inben, to disappear; fcertreten, to represent; ftuftellett, to deliver; fid) jttriicfgteljen, to withdraw; bctS Mmofett, the alms; ba§ $$£, the ABC, the alphabet; bte SBebeututtg, the meaning; bte 33rieftafd)e, the pocket-book; bte SBeriualtung, the administration; bte ^aljhmg, tne payment; *ba3 SBovt, the word; ftnf, left red)t, right f ! plbtsltrf), sudden; colltg, fully; JltfaEig, accidental. side; Semt bu SHmofett gtbft, Ia§ bettte Itnfc ©anb ntdjt imffettj toaQ beine red)te tljut. 9ttein @ol)tt fjalt afte fetne 23erfpred)imgen, ba er ntemafe nteljr berfprid)t, ate er Ijatten fantt. dlimm metnen 9iatf) — 92 - an, unb ijj ntdjtS Don bicfcr ©pctfc. 9Jiau Derratl) feme gfreunbe, tocmt man fie Dergigt. £)er 2lbuocat, bcr mid) in btefem ^roccffe bertritt, gilt Die! in nnferer (Stabt. £)ie gctnbe flofyeu in grower Uuorbnung, uadjbcm ifyre SScrfdjanjungen Don nnfern £ruppen etngc* nommcn roaren. SDie 3JJagtk fief bie Seller fallen, toeit fie fid) er^ fdjrocfeu fjatte. Die better blieben p(o$tti) ftefyen, a(3 ob fie unfere ©tarfe unb ©tcttmtg fennen lernen toollten. 2U3 roix geftem in bcr ©tabt fpajteren gingen, fanben toir eine -Srieftajdje, bie mx mitnal)= men, nm fie bem ©igentfyiimer gujufteflen. S8a3 tfyat bie 3tegienmg, al$ fie bie 9iad)rid)t Don ber ©ef angennafyme be3 $aifer8 erljieft 2 ©ie gab bem 93erlangen be3 23off8 nadj unb jog fid) Don ber 93crtt)al* tang be$ @taat8 (state) guriicf. 6$ fam un8 Dor, a(3 ob bie gcinbe fid) nad) ber @tobt juriiefgogen. (Sr fame gem nrieber, rcenn id) Hjit bate, mid) gu befucfyen. -3$ Dergafee s 2ltte£, tt>a$ ifyr mir gefagt Ijabt, tomn id) e$ mdjt auffdjriebe. : 120. Where force commands, the law is (getten) [for] nothing. Be- fore thou diest, do not forget to put (bringen) thy house in order. Read this letter, and see thyself that our last hope has dis- appeared. Help me to do my lesson before thou commencest thine. What did your friend when he receiyed the news that these men had stopped (einftetlen) their payments? He wrote me that he had made a compromise with his creditors. When Charles arrived in Cologne he found the letters that he had ex- pected. While my son began to learn his ABC, thine was already reading the classics. When we saw that we were watched, we immediately dropped our conyersation. . When we were riding [on the cars] to New York, the railroad-train suddenly stopped (ftefyen bfeiben) before we came to Newark. Where was your mother when that accident took place ? She was taking a walk with my sister. How did you become acquainted with that gentleman? I met (treffen) him accidentally at Count Bis- marck's house. We conversed more than an hour, and he in- yited me to see (bcfud)en) him at his residence. I advised that lady to take lessons of (bei) Mr. Nollet, if she commenced (subjunct.) to study Frenchf. If you did not sleep so long, f Uninflected adjective (frangoftjd)). — 93 — you would be healthier. If the moon were shining now, you would distinctly see (imperf. ) the whole mountain-chain. I would gladly die (imperf.), if I could buy (erf auf en) the liberty of my country with my death. They said that they did not fully understand the meaning of his words, with Genitive: ttniljrenb, during; megen, on account of 121. PREPOSITIONS f* with Dative: with Accusative : au$, out of (from) ; tof; it ad), after (to); ton, from (of, by) ; &U, to; fcurd), through, by; cl)ne, without; um, around, about; cj eg en, against. with Dative or Accusative : an, at; auf, upon, on; neben (near) by t beside; unter, under, below, beneath; liber, over, above; fcor, before, ago. ead of in bem; am is often used instead of an bent; in baz; an§ " " an bas; bet bem; ttom " " ton bem; gu bem; nnterm " " unterbem; $u bcr; auf 3 u " auf ba$. beim " $nm ^ur M bura>3 " " burd) ba§; Obs. — 1. 5(n, in, auf, neben, unter, iiber, cor govern the accusative, when they express a motion or direction towards an object, or a placing of some- thing on, before, etc. an object. If this is not the case, these prepositions govern the dative. In relations other than those of place, the use of the case is regulated according to an analogy to local relations, which is often difficult to determine. 2. The meanings attached above to the prepositions are only approxi- mative and denote the original conception connected with each preposition. Very frequently English prepositions must be rendered by German pre- positions not expressing their original meanings: %w\ ber (See, at sea; auf bte ^ee, to sea; auf bem ffllaxtte, at (in) the market; auf ben 2)carft, to the market; f For a complete list of prepositions see the Theoretical Course p. 60 94 CWf ber $ofr, at the post-office; cutf bem 33atle, at the ball; Qllf bem £anbe, in the country (op- posite to city); im doncerte, at the concert; im XI} eater, at the theatre; ju §auje, (at) home; am Ufer, on the shore; an ber 28anb, on the wall; in ber ©djute, at school; 3U ber 3 c *t/ at tne ^ me '» an bem £age, on the day; am 16tcn Sftat, on the 16th of May; bet %iad)t (in ber Sftadjt), at night; gu 2Betfmad)ten, at Christmas; auf bic ^oft (jur ^Soft),to the post-office; auf ben 23aU ignm 23aEe), to the ball; auf 3 £anb, to the country; tnS Concert, to the concert; inS XI) eater, to the theatre; nacf) §auje, (to) home; attS lifer, to the shore; an bte 2£anb, to the wall; gur (in bte) ^d)ule, to school; bis gu ber 3eit, (up) to the time; bis gn bem Sage, (up) to the day; bis gum 3ten Sunt, (up) to the 3d of June; am $?orgen, in (on) the morning; im fcortgen 3afyre (ttortgeS 3al)r), last year. 3. The preposition by cannot be translated by Don if it does not denote the agent of a passive verb. It is translated by burd) if it denotes by means of. 4. To is generally not translated by the mere dative if it denotes the object of a motion in space. If this motion refers to places, it is generally translated by nad), but also by other prepositions (See Obs. 2). If a person is the object of the motion, it is generally translated by gu: come to me, fomm gu mir. 5. The adverb btS, placed before prepositions denoting direction, means as far as, up to, if referring to space. Referring to countries and towns it is generally connected with nad)', which may also be left out. id) fam btS (nad)) ^Berlin, I came as far as Berlin. Referring to other localities it is mostly con- nected with 311 (btS 3um i£erge, etc.). But all other prepositions, denoting direction maybe connected with btS (btS an ben %lu% btS auf hm 23era, etc.). Eeferring to time, MS is translated by till, up to, anil is generally connected with ;m, which sometimes is dropped: btS jum 2teu SD^drg; btS (p) SBetrmad)* ten, etc. Not till is rendered by erft. SKbf alien (strong), to fall off; Ottfetjeit (strong), to look at; auffaden (strong, w. dat.), to strike; auSbretten, to extend; auStaufdjen, to exchange; beforbern, to forward, begefyren, to demand; begraben (strong), to bury; battren, to date; fid) brefjen, to revolve, to turn; ermut^tgen, to encourage; errtd)ten, to erect; errhtgen (strong), to obtain; fatten (strong), to fall; I;dngen (strong), to hang; (iegen (strong), to lie. to be (situated); ftd) tubmen (w. gen^), to boast (of); ftfeett (fafo gefeffen), to sit; ftellen, to place; fpa}teren f afyren, to take a ride; umgerjen (strong), to associate; fid) ttmgen, to venture; 95 — bte 9C(f)fe, the axis; bte Wlpm, the Alps; btc 5ltt$fid)t, the prospect; bte 2tnftrengung, the effort; ber ^3aII f the ball; ba8 23eftnben, the health; bte SBemerfung, the remark; ba$ 23oot, the boat; ba3 (Concert, the concert; bte (Stnlabung, the invitation; ber (§m(af3, tlie admission; bct3 (§t§, the ice; bie (Stfenbafytt, the railroad; ba§ (Snbe, the end; bte (Srtaubntg, the permission; Gmropa, Europe; ber gelb^ug, the campaign; bte geftung, the fortress; ber glug, the river; bte grortt, the front; ber groft, the frost; bte ®artentl)iir, the garden-gate; ba% @ebaitbe, the building; ber ©eburtStag, the birthday; bte (Megenfyeit, the occasion; ber ©tebet, the top (of roofs); ber ©tpfel, the top (of trees etc.) ; ber ©raben, the moat, ditch; ber §immet, the sky; bie §itffe, the help; bte 3ttbltftrte, the industry; bte $of)le, the coal; bte £eid)e, the corpse; bte £tfte, the list; bte %Rad)t, the power; Sftattcmb, Milan; ber SOtangef, the want; ber SDfatrft, the market; bteTOluer, the wall (outside); ber 9?ame (gen. 9?amen§), the name; ber 9?ebel, the fog; ber $ret§, the price; ber Uanb, the edge; ber $ang, the rank; ber $egen, the rain; bte Sftetfye, the row; bte Stoolutiott, the revolution; bte ®d)ilbmad)e, the sentinel; ba% @d)fad)tfelb, the field of battle; ber ©d)ttee, the snow; ber ©d)Ut3, the shelter, protection ; ber (£onntag, the sunday; bte ©tatton, the station; ber @tt)(, the style; bct§ Sweater, the theatre; bte £l)ur(e), the gate, the door; ba§ lifer, the bank (of a river); ber' Umlaut, the revolution (turning); ba§ $tef), the cattle; ber Bortfyetl, the advantage; ber 28agen, the carriage; ber 2Batf, the rampart; bte SSanb, the wall (inside); ber 3intmermann, the carpenter; abmefenb, absent; bfalt, blue; brett, broad, wide; btd)t, dense; etgen, own; etn^tg, single; ent$iicfenb, charming; erfyeMtd), considerable; gar itidjt, not at all; gefegnet, blessed; ndtf)ft, next; offentlidc), public; ftcibttfd), city (adject.); ttef, deep; unbebeutenb, inconsiderable; unerfyort, unheard of; iuett, far; mofylfeU cheap. 28ol)tn gefjett @tc (tt)0 geljen aufe? 5ftein, id) fyabe i()tt auf bie ^oft gefdjicft. 2(u (to) ttjen toofleu Sie biefe 33riefe fdjirfen ? 34) ^ a ^ e iwd) § au f e an meine $reunbe gefdjriebeu. Qd) faj$ unter bem grofteu 33aum, ber neben unferm £>aufe ftetjt; unter mt§ lag bte<2tabt, unb iiber mir wax ber blaue §immet auSgebrettet. Sir giugen unter bie Saume, um @d)uij gegen ben 9?egeu ju finben. 2Bo fommen Sie Ijer? @inb ©ie im Sweater getDcfen ? SRciri, id) fomme au3 bem (m>m) Sonccrt. £>ie gcinbe toaren burd) einige unbebeutenbe 23ortl)ei[e, bie fie iiber uufere 2lrmee errungen fatten, ermut|igt morben. 23ol)in fdjiden @ie Qijxm ©ebienten? Qd) fdjide Apt gum ©d)u^mad)er, um meine ©ttcfel abjufjolen, unb gtt $arf, um i()m eine Sinlabung git bringen. §aben ©ie cine Gintabung gar ©efettfdjaft beim ©enerat? 9?ein, mir gef)en nidjt mtiemanber um. Dljne 3fyre £>iilfe -n>are id) Dertoren getDcfen. £ie Grbe bretjt fid) um bie Sonne unb um (on) i()re eigene 2(cf)fe. SBafyrenb be3 ganjen getbgug^ lonnte ber fyetttb fid) nid)t ctneS eingigen ©tegeS rufymen. 3 U f e * ner 3 e ^ ^^ren ber gleig unb bie Onbuftrie be^ 8anbc8 gefegneter, ate in biefem O^^rc. 2tm nad)* ften 9)?orgen ttad^ ber @d)tadjt begruben uufere ©olbaten ifjre Jobten unb bie ber geinbe. S)iefer 33rief ift t)om 10, b. 2J?.f batirt, aber erft am 18. gefd)rieben unb am 20. gur ^oft gefanbt iuorbem ©cr t ticfe3SKoiiatS. — 97 — ©fenbaljnsug tarn bte natf) Zxofy fonnte aberf Don bort abj ntdjt inciter beforbert iberbett; £>er $ug ^ am && S ur nac^ftett Station, blieb abcr bort an$ (from.for) Sftanget an (of) £of)Ieu liegenff. 23i3 gum $af)re 1866 gait s $renj3en nnr at8 cine £DZad)t (beS) gmeiten 9tohge& 9llfc ftabtifd)e(n) 2(bgabcn miiffen [nod)] bor bent erfteu 3annar bejaljtt toerben. 2Bir blieben lange Dor bem ©ebanbe ftefyen, nnb taufdjten nnferc 33emerfnngen fiber (on) ben pradjtigen @tt)f an3. £>er grogte Zfytil nnferer £rnppen Jam in biefer ©cfyfodjt gar nidjt Dor ben geinb. S3 pet nn3 anf, bafj bie Stegiernng Dor aftc Sffenttidjen ©ebanbe ©cfyUbtoadjen geftettt Ijatte. 122. During that whole time not one of our entrenchments was carried by the enemy. On account of the dense fog, our boat was detained seven hours at (bei) Poughkeepsie. After un- heard of efforts the general arrived with his army at six o'clock in the (Gen.) evening on the field of battle. By what efforts have you made it possible to arrive so soon ? Does this name stand on your list? No, but I shall place (fe£eu) it immediately on the list. I sent the carpenter to (anf) the top of the roof in order to repair it. I believe that somebody is listening (fyordjen) at the door ? Go to (an) the window, and look (jn- feljen) whether our carriage is at (Dor) the gate? I see that the plaster (ber £aff) on these walls has (ift) almost fallen off. He has erected a beautiful villa on (an) the edge of the forest. Where (whither) do you intend (too Hen) to ride? I only intend to take a ride through the city. When are you going to re- turn home ? At half past eight o'clock. Are you going to the concert to-night ? No, I shall go to the ball at Mr. Nollet's. How long have you been in this country, and where do you come from ? I come from Metz, and have been here almost nine years. How long did you stay [out] in the country? Only a couple of days. How many of your children go to school ? Only two; the others I am still keeping (befyaltcn) at home. f W)tX is frequently placed after one or more words of the sentence, j %b is often used to increase the force of fcon, denoting a starting point, ft £tegen bleiben, to be detained. — 98 — Why do you not place (ftellen) your cattle under shelter (trans- late: under a roof)? Below the walls of the fortress are broad and deep moats. Will you not go to the general, and ask him for (um) protection against these soldiers ? Jupiter revolves in 10 days on his axis, and his revolution about the sun lasts (bauern) almost 12 years. Did you do this without the per- mission of your father ? This man lived at the time of the French revolution. My friend's birthday fell upon a Sunday. After many years you will acknowledge that I was right. Be- fore our last war, the prices of (the) victuals were considerably cheaper than now. Fiftyf years ago there were no rail- roads in the country. During the whole battle the officers were before the front. The general sent all his officers before the front. I have planted a whole row of trees before my house. On the morning after the battle, the corpses lay thick (bidjt) on the field of battle. On that day we met (treffen) but (mtr) few of the enemy (translate: few enemies). On (bci) that occasion our soldiers took a great number of prisoners. My friend returned home on the 10th of March; he will not depart again till the 20th of June ($ittu). He will be absent till the 10th of July (^utt). Will General Sheridan remain in Europe till the end of the war? We came on our journey as far as Milan; last year we came only up to the Alps. 123. 28ot>on, of what; bat)0tt, of that, of it; lt> omit, with what; bamtt, with that, with it; U)0£U, to (for) what; bct^U, to (for) that, to (for) it; tDOVan, at what; bavatl, at that, at it; ttiorin, in what; barm, in that, in it; ftoburd), by what; baburd), by that, by it. §erab, f)tnab, down; krauf, Ijmauf, up; IjerauS, l)tnau3, out; herein, f)tnein, in; Ijeriiber, ijmiiber, over. t See the list of numerals in the theoretical course. — 99 — Obs.— 1. All these particles are formed of prepositions, combined with the adverbs X\)0, ba r I)er and I)in. If, in the formation of these words, two vowels meet, an r is inserted. 2. The prepositions with which these adverbs are combined, are liable to the same variation of meaning, as if they were separated: 2$ o r a n (not tt)ODon) bertfett ©te, of what do you think ? (the verb benfert being construed with an, not with toon); ft) t) on Ijangt e$ ah, on what does it depend? (the verb abfydngetl being construed with Don, not with aitf). 3. The adverbs formed by prefixing n)0 and ba must always be used instead of prepositions connected with the interrogative ft) a 8 or with per- sonal and demonstrative pronouns in the neuter gender. They are not ad- missible if what, being followed by nouns, must be rendered by ft>e(d)er, e, e§: Cf what books, Don toeldjen SBiidjern (not tootton 33iid)ern). The adverbs combined with ha are used if the personal pronoun or demonstrative depend- ent on a preposition, refers to things masculine, feminine, neuter in either number, but not in reference to persons. I have made no use of them (the books), id) Ijabc fetrten ©ebraud) b a b o n gemad)t. 4. The compounds with Ijcr and Ijnt are mostly used in combination with verbs of motion, forming separable compounds with them. The forms with l)er and fytn are distinguished by the standpoint which the speaker is conceived to occupy. If the motion, expressed by the verb, is represented as directed towards the speaker, the compounds with Jjcr are used. If the motion has a direction away from the speaker, the compounds with I)in must be employed: I go down, id) gd)e I) in ab; he is walking down the mountain, et Cjcl)t OOnt SBerge f) e i a b (if the speaker is represented as being below). 5. All transitive and reflexive verbs form their perfects and plu- perfects active by means of the auxiliary Ijabcn. Neuter verbs generally take the same auxiliary. But the following neuter verbs form these tenses with the auxiliary jetn: a) Neuter verbs, expressing a motion from one place to another, as fommen, get)en, reiten (to ride on horseback), fttel)en (to flee), $urucffet)ren (to return), begegnen (to meet), fatten (to fall): 3d) to a r (not id) Ijatte) guriicfge* fefyrt, I had returned; id) b in (not id) fyabt) gefommen, I have come. b) Those neuter verbs, denoting a transition from one state to another, as: fterben, to die; ertrcmfen, to fall sick; road)fen, to grow; fcerfhtfen, to sink, genejen, to recover, and a great many others: id) b in (not id) Ijabc) geftorbeu, I have died. c) Some verbs that cannot be classified, as: bleiben, to remain (stay); gel'tngen, to succeed; miftlingen, to fail; fotgen, to follow. ^Cbfyangen Don, to depend on; entroeidjen (strong), to escape; aufrtmdjen, to awake; erfranfen, to fall sick; beftefyen (strong) in, to consist in, genefen (strong), to recover; — ICO — fatten (strong), to hold; ba8 dongregmttglteb, the member cf Ijeremfommen, ) ... Congress; l)tuemfommen, f to come m, get m; 3^^ Germany; Ijcmntretett (strong), i . bit temttntg, the attainment; Ijiucmtreten, [ to step m; tie 2Rinute, the minute; I)cvubcrfd)H)immen (strong), ) to sw i in ber ^affagter, the passenger; Ijtiiuberjdjnrimmen, j over; ber ®d)luffct, the key; Ictben (strong) an, to suffer of; bie aft bit nidjt geljort, lnomtt $ari fidj fyente betm £el)rer ent|d)utbtgt Ijat? $dj t)abe nid)t3 baoon gefyort. £)at er nidjt gefagt, bap er ju fpiit Don feiner 9?eife jnriidgefefyrt f ei ? 9?ein, bam it Ijat er fid) iiidjt entfdjidbtgt 2Biffen @ie, luoranff §err Collet geftorbcu ift? $ft er tuefteidjt an ber ©djunnbfndjt geftorben? £aran ift er [rool)(] fdjtoerlidj (hardly) geftorben; benn cr Ijat.me baron (of) gettttctu Sarnm finb Ste nidjt geftern auf (into) mein 3immcr gegangen ? $tf) toare gent fyinanfgegangen, \x>cm\ id) btn ©djtiifjet baju gcl)abe Ijattc. So befinbet fid) }e£t Qi)V £)err 33ruber? Gr ift nadj 3)cntfdjtanb guriitf gereift. Sirb er nidjt batb tr>ieber Ijer* iiberfommen? Qd) glanbe nidjt, er ift je^t langer tjier geblieben, al$ cr anfangfidj beabftdjttgte. Sobnrd) Ijat Qty greunb fein SSermogen fcerforen? Siadjbcm faft afic feine Unternefymungcn mij$(nngen toaren, ift fein 33nd)f)a(ter mit einer gropen ©mame entnndjen, 3ft nidjt Sari pom £)adje gefallen ? (£% wax nidjt Sari, ber Ijerabge* fatten ift, fonbern fein S3rubcr. Sarnm fcib iljr nidjt git un8 IjeranS anfs 8anb gefommen? Sir lonntcn nidjt fyinanSfommen; bie Sege toaren jn fdjledjt. £reten ©ie fjeretn, [meine] £erren. Sir nritrben gem Ijineintreten, toenn &ir £tit fatten. Qdj erfndje @te, ntcinen t 2Bofcon, of what, must be well distinguished from Don ft)0, from where. % Prepositions cannot be contracted with the article, if a relative clause follows. ft To die of a disease, an etner ilranffyett fterben. 101 — @oI)tt nut fid) Ijeriiberjubrtngen, tt>emt ©te toon ^^nfretrf) jurutf* reifen. Qd) totirbe Qijixn Boljn mit bent gro^tett SSergnitgett gu 3^nen Ijeritberbringen, toemt er nidjt fdjon abgeretft todre. 124. On (t)0tt) what will the condemnation of the President de- pend ? It will depend on the votes of two or three members of Congress. Do you know that Charles's father has come (in order) to take his son home? Of that nothing is known (be* fcumt) to me. With what have you occupied yourself during the year? I have occupied myself with literary labors, but I am now done (ferttg) with them. Are you invited to (ju) the President's party (@efe(lfd)aft) ? No, I have no invitation to it. Of (an) what do you think ? I am thinking of the steamboat that has sunk in the river. Have [there] been many passengers in it? Their number is not known to me. It is now the highest time to begin this work; let us go at it immediately. In what do the attainments of this man consist ? Why did you read in that book? I did not read at all in it. At what o'clock did you awake (Per/.) this morning? I did not awake (Per/,) till nine o'clock, because I had returned very late from my journey. Has General Smith died of (an) his wound? No, he has not died of it; he has entirely (ttottftcinbtg) recovered. Why did you not remain (Perf.) home yesterday? I was obliged (miiffen) to see my brother, who had suddenly fallen sick. Can you not come down for (aitf with accus.) a few minutes ? I cannot come down now, you must wait. Do me the favor to send up your servant to me. I cannot send him up; he must hold my horses, but I shall come up myself. When we had arrived at (bet) the river, I requested my friend to swim over with me. Dear Charles, come over to us for (auf) a few days, all your friends are expecting you. Who is knocking at the door? It is William. Tell him to come in. When we found that the street-door was locked, we tried to get in by the garden- gate. Dbgfetdj, obfdjon, 0btD0t)l r rcenn gletd) f roenn |d)on, roenn aud), nnctt)ol)i, 102 — 125. although, though; and) roenn (roenn and)), J ov _ n . f . felbft iueiut (roenn fefbft), j ven ' menu and) nod) fa (feijr), however (much)? benn (conjunction), for (conjunction). Obs. — 1. The different German conjunctions corresponding to although and even if, require the verb to be at the end of the clause. Those connected with ob may be separated (ob — gfetd), etc.), and often take other words of the sentence, especially pronouns, between them. Cb ftur gleidr) fal)en, al- though we saw. Such words may also be interposed between the different combinations of tt>entt, if the conjunction toeutx precedes. 2. The principal sentence, if.it follows the clause with the equivalents of although, is generally introduced by fo, and after the verb generally is in- serted one of the particles bod), bennod), cjtetd)tt>of)t, corresponding to the English still, yet, nevertheless: obgletd) rotr friil) famen, fo mufjten anr bod) (bermod), gletd)roof)i) lange roarten, although we came early, we (still) were obliged to wait a long time. 3. The conjunction roenn, either standing alone (if), or in connection with gletd), fd)0tt, aud) (although), may be entirely dropped, and in this case the sentence is construed as if it were a question, beginning with the verb, followed by the subject. The particle fo is then generally employed as a con- nective: fommft bit, fo gefye id), if thou comest, I go. 3ft beirt $ater abgereifr, fo roerbe id) and) abreifen, if thy father has departed, I shall also depart. SBdre betn greunb gefnnb, fo roiirbe er l)ter fein, if thy friend were well (were thy friend well) he would be here. 2$ar er gletd) entmutl)lgt (roenn g(eid) er. enttmttljtcjt roar), fo oer^roetfelte er boc^ nid)t, although he was discouraged, he [still] did not despair. 28cirft bu and) nod) fo fteigtg, fo fonnteft bu e3 bod) (bennod)) nid)t tljlttt, however diligent thou mightst be, thou couldst [still] not do it. 4. Diminutives are formed from most German substantives by the end- ing d) ett , softening the radical vowel, and being of neuter gender: ber @ol)tt — ba§ @5I)nd)en (the little or dear son). 5. Almost all personal male names form female appellatives by the ending in , eliding the endings e and en: ber $renge — Me ^reugtn (the Prussian woman); ber £>td)ter (poet) — bte S)id)tertn (poetess); ber $er$og (duke) — bte §crjogin (duchess). Some soften the radical (@raf — ©rtifinj* In the plural they double their final n (£)td)terinnen). 103 $rtgeben (strong), to state; ftd) anftrengett, to exert one's self; aueborren, to parch; bliitjen, to blossom; erreidjen, to obtain; eqtelett, to derive; tterborrett, to dry np; mad)fen (strong), to grow; Dertimtten, to administer, to manage; jettfjttett, to draw (make a draft) ; tie 2lnmutl), the grace; ba3 8ett, the bed; bte (Stgenfdjaft, the quality; bte (Srroartung, the expectation; bte gran^oftn, the Frenchwoman; ber ©ebraittf), the use; bte ©egenb, the landscape, the grounds; bte ©elefyrfamfeit, the scholarship; ber ©etft, the mind; ber ©fallbe, the faith; ber ©runb, the reason; ba$ ©lit, the property; bte &fart)eit, the clearness; btetoibe, the chalk; bfl$ SRittel, the instrument, the means; bte 9ead)ftd)t, the indulgence; ber 9ftlli)m, the glory; bte @d)5nl)ett, the beauty; bte Xapferfett, the valor; ber Umrtg, the sketch; bte 2Bets!)ett, the wisdom; ber 2Bitte, the will; bte fitting, the (news) paper; ber £>K>ed, the purpose; gefeljrt, learned; gemtft, certain; glcin$enb, brilliant; graufam, cruel; fd)ttmrf), weak; mttoafyr, untrue. Seim it>r cntd) nod) fp fCctgig feib, I however dili t you are (go fletjjtg tf)r ciud) |etb f j & (£§ fet)It (mattgelt, gebrtdr)t) mtr an etrter 'Sad)e, I am deficient in a thing, destitute of a thing, I lack a thing. Dutt)of)( c$ gebfifct ijat, fo fyaben nrir bod) fetnen Conner geljort. Dbgletd) t>ie!9iegen gefatfen ift, fo finb nnfere 9S:ge bod) gut; benn bte Srbe wax Don ber !Qtyt Dotlftanbtg (perfectly) auSgeborrt toorbem Ob bent ©ofyn fd)on ftarf (rapidly; geroadjfen ift, fo fdjemt e$ mir gteid)tt>ol)(, ba§ er flciner ift, ate metn SUbcrt. SSenn id) gleidj feine grofte ©elefyrfamfeit beto unbent nutate, fo gfaubte id) bod), ba£ e$ feinem ©eifte an Slarljctt fetjte. Senn ifyr aud) §(He3, tt>a3 ifyr Ber- fprodjen fyabt, tfjatet, fo ftmrbet ifyr bod) cucrn 3tt>ecf ntdfjt erreidjen. ipatte mein 33ruber fcin ©ittcfjen fetbft dermattet, fo nritrbe er mefyr Stnnafjmen baranS erjieft Ijabcn. £>ort ber firicg nid)t bati> auf, fo miiffen ttur nnfer §au$djen unb ©artdien berfaufen. §at bent 9?ater g(eid) feme ©ritnbe angegeben, fo mupt bit bid) bennod) feinem SBiflen fiigen. ©eib if)r mtr ftci§ig # toirb eud) ber @rfo(g rtid^t fef)(en. SSaret ifjr aud) f)ier r fo fonntet iljr in ber ©ad)e (matter) bod) nid)t$* Snbent. 3ft g(eid) bte ©ret fin nod) nidjt dofltg genefen, fo ift fie ben* nodj mit alien ifyren £)ienertnnen abgereift. $attt id) nnr etn ©titdf* — 104 — djcn firetbe bet (with) mtr, fo toiirbe id) eincn Umrtft ber ©egenb fjter an bie £I)ttr jeicfynen. SBcnn id) and) gugebcn muj}, ba§ ba% SSud) meljrere gute fitgenfdjafien Ijat, fo fann id) gteidjtuot)! fetnen ©ebraud) bacon madjcn. ©etbft iDcnn ber Sontg btc3 gefagt fyatte, lutirbc id) e3 bennod) ntdjt gtauben. 2(ud) noenn bcr@eneral j[e|t [nod)] [iegen fotlte (to be victorious), ttnirbe er bod) fetnen fritfyeren 9M)m nte* mate ttncber erfangen (recover). SSemt ifjr and) nod) fo retd) ttiaret (tndret ifyr and) nod) fo retd)), fo fonntet tf)r bod) biefe ©nmme ntd)t 3a()(en. SSemt ifyr and) nod) fo (ange f)ier bleibt, fo werbet iljr hod) DergcbUd) marten, So gelefyrt btefer SDJann and) ift, fo gebrtdjt e3 if)in bod) an 23et^[)eit. 126. Although*}- these men are deficient in many qualities, they certainly are not destitute of valor. Though we had gone very late to bed, we yet rose very early in the morning. Al- though this man is not learned, still he is a very good teacher. Although we have no claim to (anf) your indulgence, we never- theless think that you will excuse us in this matter; for we have acted in good faith. Although our little trees (dimin.) blos- somed in the spring, they (yet) have dried up in the summer. Although the news was confirmed in the papers, he still be- lieved that it was untrue. However much they exerted them- selves, their efforts were fruitless (oergebltd)). However cruel this king was, he still was not destitute of good qualities. Al- thoughj the Italian women are renowned for (roegcn) their beauty, they lack the grace of the French [women]. If this little house (dimin. ) belonged to me, I should sell it. If your friend does not arrive to-day, we must go (reifcu) to him. If the king keeps his word, the people will be happy. Although his instruments were not always well chosen, still his designs were certainly good. Although our hopes are weak, our efforts will be great. Had it not rained, we certainly should have come. However brilliant this victory was, the results did not warrant (redjtfcrtigcn) our expectations. j) j In translating the sentences with although, all different modes of ex- pression should be employed in succession. % In all the sentences following below, the conjunction roemt must be dropped, the sentences being rearranged accordingly. 105 121. Sing, ber -Iftanit Flur. bte £ente (if used as an indefinite aggregate of persons). Sing, ber $aufmamt Plur. bte $aufteute (not $auf manner). 7^t* Most of the compounds with 2ftann form the plural £ente, not banner. Obs. — 1. Participles if used as adjectives, are declined with the same endings as adjectives, either after the strong or weak declension: etn cjetrocf- neter 2fyfet, a dried apple; ber getrocfnete 2tpfet, the dried apple. They are also subject to comparison with the same endings, as ordinary adjectives: gebttbet, educated; gebiibeter, more educated; etn gebtlbeterer 2ftcmn, a more educated man. 2. Present participles add the ending enb to the stem of the verb: tobenb, praising; eine Miifyenbe Stabt, a flourishing town. 3. Adjectives and participles, used with the force of adjectives, are generally placed before their nouns, even when they have one or more ad- juncts. The adjuncts, in this case, generally precede their adjectives, and are placed between the article or determinative pronoun, and the noun. In English, such phrases must be placed after the noun, and often they must be replaced by relative or other clauses: (Sht feutem SBatertanbe ergebencr 23iirgcr, a citizen devoted to his country (who is devoted to his country). 2)te tljre Sltern liebenben £tnber, the children loving their parents (that love their parents). (Sine mtt gufyrroerfen angefiitlte ©trajje, a street crowded with vehicles. 4. The German infinitive with the neuter article (or other determina- tive) is used with the force of the English participial noun in ing. It is then declined like other substantives in en: ba§ £oben, the praising; Gen. be3 £oben§, of the praising; Dat. bem Sobcn, Ace. ba$ £oben. $lnfertigen, to compile; ^ffiigen, to plow; beranben (with Gen.), to deprive of; raffintren, to refine; befdjvanfen, to limit; ■ rttjen, to charm; betrcmen, to entrust; rnfen (strong), to call; betriiben, to afflict; fdjtegen (strong), to fire; briillen, to bellow; fdjreien (strong), to shout; entblbften, to denude; taufdj'en, to disappoint; erbtttern, to exasperate; toben, to rage; erfafyren (strong v.), to experience; *iiberjet)en (strong), to overlook; etid)uttern, to move, to affect; *unterf)alten (strong), to entertain; erftarren, to benumb; berftarfen, to increase; fiiljleit, to feel; toeritben, to commit; — 10G ber 2lbfaH, the defection; ber :UnDacf)tspla£, the place of worship; biT ^vbeitgcber, the employer; Dcr Strbettsmantl, the workingman; ber s 2UieruanDerer, the emigrant; bcr Stltblicf, the sight; trie 33creitroitttgfeit, the readiness; bie iBeitte, the booty; bie iBliite, the blossom; ber Girtbrucf, the impression; bie (Stttlaffuug, the dismissal; bie (grpreffitng, the extortion; ber (££CeJ3, the excess; bie ©emetnbe, the congregation; bie ©iocfe, the bell; bie ©raujamfett, the cruelty; ba$ §er v the heart; *ber $art}ier, the chancellor; ber .ftiinftler, the artist; ber £anbmarttt, the countryman (hus- bandman); ber Sanbsmcinn, the countryman (being of the same country); bie iDZencje, the multitude; ber *plan, the plan; •btt ^lUtft, the point; bie *j3voMn§, the province; bie Stegimg, the emotion; bdS Uttid), the empire; ber Sinn, the sense; ber £>tall, the stable; bas talent, the talent; bte Xtyat, the exploit; ber Sfyeil, the part; bie Umftdjt, the circumspection; bas Urtfyetf, the judgment; ber SBeften, the West; begicrtg auf, eager for; empfe()lcn$iuertr), commendable; enrfefcttd), terrific; furdjtbctr, fearful; liiftern nad), greedy of; neuer(id), (adv.), recently; rofy, rude; fd)6n, fine; fd)mer$fid), painful; jhrfg auf, proud of; unfaljtg (with Gen.), incapable of; lingeritfyrt, untouched: Dertraut nut, privy to: DoU, full; mefetltftd) fur, essential to. @& befinbet fid) (there is) ciit crfafjretter SSmtbargt auf bem Sir arbettcn jefet nut berftarftem gfctfjt. ©u fyaft mir etit retgenbcS 23ud) geiiefjen. 28ir fatten tjeute ben iBefud) mefjrerer xcu jenber Saufleute. ©as 8efeu unterfjattenber 33iid)er ift uidjt immer cmpfefjtensroertl), SSir bemerfteu Diele mtt ^fftigen befdjcifttgte 8anb* lente. £)a$ Sdjreieu uub Xobcu bcr erbitterten 2Jtenge toax fnrdjtbar. £5a3 8eiben btcfer Don alter £mlfe entbtoflten Seute mar cntfc^lid). £}cr Slbfatt ber feinem 3ieid)c fo fauge treu gett>cfenen ^roDinjcn erfdjiitterte ben Sontg tief. £ie neuerfid) Don Ghtropa angefom* raenen SUteitmnberer nmrben fogletdj nad) bem 23eften beforbert. 9iid)t3 mad)t ctnen betritbenbercn Gtnbrutf, aU etu toafyrenb be§ SommerS fetner flatter beraubter 33aum. SDtefe nad) 9?u^m fo begterige SSinftlertn fitljfte fid) fd)mcr$tid) gctaufdjt, ajfe bad Urttjeit ber 9J?enge itjr befannt ju toerben anfing. £>ie Dor (with) groft faft erftavrten ©olbaten nmrben mtt raffintrter ©raufamfeit Don ben nad) — 107 — Settle lufternert Canbteutcn gctobtct. 2S3tr I)aben immer mtfere armen, t>om Unglttd (distress) bctroffcitcn (involved in) Sanbsleute mit grower 33ereitnnlltgfett uuterftiifet. £)ie rofycn unb auf ifyre Xfjatcn ftoljen Solbaten Dcrubtctt bie grobften (grob, brutal) Gjceffe. 128. This news was very painful to the afflicted father. This is true f gelten) in a more limited sense than you seem to believe. I shall not answer (beantroorten) these insulting remarks. The firing of the troops taking part in this battle, lasted till (the) evening. The carpenters, threatened with dismissal from their places (bie ©telle), submitted to the extortions of their em- ployers. The officers (civil;, entrusted with the compiling of these lists, accomplished their tasks (2(ufgabc) in less than three months. We heard the bellowing of the cattle (bie 9itn= ber, plur.) returning to their stables. The tolling (tauten) of the bells, calling the congregations to their places of worship, made a solemn impression. We were shown (translate by man) the works of several [lady] artists, [who are] renowned for (roegen) their talents. Although the workingmen, disappointed in their hopes, were exasperated at (fiber with accus.) their em- ploy ers, they soon returned to ( ]\x) their work. These points so essential to us, have been entirely overlooked by you. There is no finer sight than an apple-tree (standing) in full blossom. This heart, incapable of all higher emotions, remained untouched. The chancellor [who was] privy to all the plans of the king, prepared this enterprise with great circumspection. 129. Infinitive. mogen, to like; bdrfen, to be at liberty, to be Huff en, to know, allowed, Present Indicative. id) mag, 1 may; id) barf, 1 am at liberty etc.; id) toeitj, I know; bu magft, thou mayest; bu barf ft, thou art at liberty; btt tneiftt, thou knowest; er mag, he may; cr barf, he is etc. er metjs, he knows; tt>ir mogen, we may; rntr biirfen, we are etc., nrtr mtffeti, we know; ttjr mogt, you may; ifyr bitrft, you are etc.; tt)t Unfit, you know; flc mogen, they may; fte biirfert, they are etc.; fte Unffett, they know. — 108 — Present Subjunctive. id) mogc, etc. id) biirfe, etc. id) rtuffc,ctc. Imperfect Indicative, id) mod)te, I migl it etc. id) biirfte, I was at liberty; id) ttmgte, I knew. Imperfect Subjunctive. id) mocfyte, I might; id) biirfte, I were at liberty, td) roiigte, I knew. Imperative, miffe, nrigt, miffen ®ie. Obs. — 1. SCRogeit in the present and imperfect denotes a possibility, de- pendent on contingency: bie§ mag fid) $utragen, this may happen. With a negation it generally expresses / do not like to, and in the subjunctive im- perfect (with or without negation) often I should wish or like. 3d) mag bie§ nid)t tfymt, I do not like to do this; id) mocfyte bie3 fyaben, I should like to have this. 2. May in questions is generally rendered by biirfen: barf id) eintreten, may I enter ? In the subjunctive imperfect it denotes probability: bie§ biirfte mafyr feht, this is probably true. Must with a negation may be generally translated by (nid)t) biirfen: rotr biirfen bte3 ntcfyt tfyun, we must not do this. 3. All modal auxiliaries (mogen, biirfen, miiffen, fonnen, roott'eat, fatten) form past participles (gemocfyt, geburft, gemnj$t, gefonnt, geroour, gefollt), and all compound tenses (Fut. id) roerbe fonnen, I shall be able; id) roerbe miiffen, I shall be obliged; id) roerbe biirfen, I shall be at liberty, etc.). Their past participles in the perfect and pluperfect generally take the form of their infinitives ; Perf.: id) fyabe nid)t fommen f o n it e n ,t I nave not Deen aole to come (I could not come); id) l)abe bte3 nid)t tl)Utt mogen, I have not liked (did not like or wish) to do this; id) fyabe nid)t fommen biirfen, I have not been at liberty (was not at liberty) to come; id) fyabe had) ©aufe gefyen miiffen (fatten), I have been obliged (was obliged) to go home. The pluperfects are in the same way formed by id) fyatte. 4. The English potential pluperfects with could, should (ought to) are translated by the pluperfect subjunctives of the verb fomten, fatten^ nnb miiffen with the present infinitive of the main verb; id) fydtte bie$ nicfyt fcfyreiben fonnen, I could not have written this; fte fy a 1 1 e n nicfyt fo friifye fommen foil en (or miif|cn\ you should not have come so early; er fydtte bie ^cfylad)t geroinnen mix)) en (or foUen),ff he ought to have won the battle. 5. If clauses in which the infinitive of the modal auxiliaries is used with the force of a participle, are introduced by one of the conjunctions baft, f The perfects and pluperfects of the modal auxiliaries are only then formed with the past participles, if the infinitive, dependent on these verbs is understood: id) fyabe e 8 nicfyt gefonttt, / have not been able [to do it], etc. J Provided that should lias not the force of a simple conditional, in which case it is rendered by roiirbe, with the perfect infinitive. ft The literal translation of these English potential pluperfects, by mean's of fonnte etc. with the perfect infinitive has an entirely different meaning. They are used only in special circumstances. — 109 — ItJeiW etc., requiring the verb to be at the end, the auxiliaries fyabe, I]atte and rj&tte can never be placed at the end of the clause, but must precede the inuni- tive of the main verb, as: rDetm tf)V l)Qttet fommen fonnen, if you could have come (not menu ifyr fommen fonnen fyattet). 6. The preposition without before a verbal noun in ing, is rendered by orjtte and an infinitive with jut ot)ne belt Tiam $U fermen, without knowing the man; ofyne it)H c^efefjen $U l)aben, without having seen him; ofyne t% tfymt flit fonrten, without being able to do it. 7. SSiffcn is construed with ^u and the infinitive, corresponding to the English know how to etc. : et Itlufjte fid) $U mdgtgen, he knew how to restrain himself. 8. ^Pflegett with }U and the infinitive corresponds to the English to be in the habit of with the participial noun in ing, or to I am icont with the infinitive. In the imperfect it is generally translated by I used to: rotr pflcgen am 2)?orgen flit baben, we are in the habit of bathing (we are wont to bathe) in the morn- ing; id) pfiegte mid) nttt meinen grettnben u'ber btcfen ©egenftanb ju untert)a{* ten, I used to converse with my friends on the subject. Slnrurjren, to touch; auflejen (strong), to pick up; au3brucfen, to express; auSrtdjteu, to execute; 23ebenfeu tragen (strong), to hesitate; bettragen (strong), to contribute; fid) benel)men (strong), to behave; benu^en (with Ace), to make use of; befnd)en (with Ace), to attend to; fid) betrjetltgen an, to engage in; betreten, to enter; friirjftitcfert, to breakfast; gebetfyeu (strong), to prosper; in $enutntj3 fe£en, to notify; fvonen, to crown; fid) mijefyen, to mingle; ftoren (with Ace), to intrude on; iibereinftimmen, to agree; *uberlegen, to consider; nn^ufrteben fetn, to find fault; oeroffentlidjen, to divulge; tooii)erfer}ett (strong), to foresee; Oortragcn (strong), to deliver (a speech); toerftdjern, to. assure; rtueberferjen (strong), to see again; giefyen (strong), to draw; bie 2(ntrpovt, the answer; ber 2luffar3, the composition; ber s 2luf tract, the commission; ber s #uelanber, the foreigner; bte StfSfldjt, the chance; bie 33e!anntfd)aft, the acquaintance; ba$ 23etragen, the conduct; bie 23tbttot()cf, the library; bte 5°frtA tne consequence; ber @ejd)tiftebrief, the business letter, ba$ $iaoier, the piano; Die $trd)e, the church; ber $o fieri, the lot; ber $ebncr, the speaker; ber ®d)luJ3, the conclusion; ber ed)ltlbfd)eilt, the draft; bte epracfje, the language; bte 3petjen (pi.), the eatables; berUmfcmg, the extent; bev Untergebene, the clerk; bie 2Baare, the article (of trade); gan$, quite; gered)tferttgt, warranted ; jebenfafls, at all events; mit llnred)t, wrongly, unjustly; fcerautmortUd), responsible ; roafjrjdjeutftd), probable. — 110 — £)ie$ mag ber 3>aK f e ^ °^ er ni^t; iebenfaCf^ fonnen ©te e3 nid)t toiffen. SKogen ©ie uerfidjert fettt (rest), [meine] §erren, baft id) oou bcr ganjcn ©adje nid)t$ loeift, unb mit Unredjt jene$ 23erbred)cn$ bcfdjutbtgt toorben bin. SKein 33ruber mag ftd) in btefe ©ad)e (affair) uid)t mifdjen. $d) mag biefcn 9Wann ntdjt nuebcrfeljcn. Wflodjtm ©ie [tt)Oi)I] 3t)ren ©ruber iiberrafdjen, ttmut er oon feiner $eife ja^ riitffeljrt? ©ttrfen ©ie biefe ©ibliot^e! benu^en? $a, id) barf fie beuutjen, fo oft (as often as) id) null. SDarf id) mid) nad) .3rljrem 33efinbett erfunbigen? SDiirfen Qt\vt ©oljne Ijeute nut mir aufs 8anb gefyeu ? 9Mn, meine ©ot)ne biirfen fyeute gar nicfit au3gef)eu. SDie ©olbaten burften fid) ntdjt mit einanber unterfjalten. £>iefe £>erren toiffen fid) nid)t ju benefymen. £>tefer Stusfanber nmfcte fid) fefyr gut (well) in unferer ©pradje auSjubriicfen. Qd) pflege bie ^eitungen ju lefen, fobalb (as soon as) id) cjefriifyftiitft fjabe. ©etn ©ruber pflegte bie Don bm ©aumen Jjerabgefallenen Slepfet anfgnte fen, unb fie nad) ber ©tabt git briugen. $onnen ©ie 'Staoter fpieten ? 9iein, id) tjabe e3 niemats ternen mogen. Qd) tjabe nid)t ein einjigeS 2Bort biefeS 9Jebner3 uerftefjen fonnen. Sir Ihtaben fatten nod) ntemats biefeS dimmer betreten biirfen* fatten ©ie nid)t fritter ju nu3 fjeriibeilommen fonnen ? Qd) fjatte e3 geit)iJ3 getljan, loenn id) gefonnt Ijatte. ©te fatten biefen 2luffafe nidjt beffer fdjreiben fonnen; aber ©ie fatten il)n beffer oortragen folten. Qd) ttmrbe ben Sluffalj beffer gefdjrieben Ijabeh, inenn id) bie offenttidje ©ibliot^ef fycitte be* uut^en biirfen. Qd) roerbe $f)ren ^5(an anSjnfiiljren fcerfudjen, aber ofyne mid) fiir beffen (its) (Srfotg oerantroortlid) jn madjen. <5r fefyrte don ber ©tabt ^uritd, otjne feineu 2Iuftrag au§gerid)tet $u ijabeu. $d) wax lange in ber ©tabt, oljne mit §errn 9Mfet fpredjen ju lon- nen. ?,<-&^<£?^if' SS; <£-^^ S/^C^^^r<& /&>&&^fri -^^^<-^y/^y^ -&-/?^A<'-&'&' J 2 s- 67 c ^-1? : 67- //y, ■■&&-&^&' -&&^<£^&<- -&&%!*"&> -^-/^^f-^-^^c -€&> ^ "J 2 # * bequem, comfortable. 114 -/jf^o?'/ ■?■?7i<-*ie-&.A<- Y7. ^&&-& ^^ ^Y^^ <&^/&7i<> &t~ xl i^&rtt^/^ tz^^/a^ ^^^^^^^^^ ^-6& /^^■/^k^-Y -&&Z>^Y?>& -&^ ^ ^^^<- ^-&£ y ^yy^<- ^=^5^^ Y9: -€%>&L&'A&&t> ?£^&j%Y &*/<& ^^-^^^ J -jp# yyyy ?y yyy rt2 -frrt*- je-^Z- &f?Z\ CY&7,*- 7/^7 y yyyy j ■ ^^&&7&^>^ iz>/ai^ ^^^-^^- -?^^-&-^7x2>7A?<& . ^-zr^rA^t- -&&A&&Z j£-&Z *^-zs*^- <&&&'&& v£ ya ■&■&<- ^i%£ ?& y6^>^-€^y^^ -r^-^^^^^y -&<■ -t^&i&-&^ffr?<& L^>*&z- €&&?£'&'6Z-?i<- ^^&& // _ „ / y #2- *£&<■ ?Z -£&■&& /^m^ &&&■ ^^ -/&&i&?&7 X^7?>A?Z^> A^>6&^XZ?l<-'9 . XXX^- ^Z^A^T^O t-^C'/r*'^^?^'* /? yJ-ZA^i^ 6C^'&^-&X2''&-y<^'&'-&*- •&0&/&&"?-7-'&<> £/ C^Z*'^ &-&£& -XXyzx-AAA i&&^7A/> yXy/AZ>ZX'Xy>X 7" . &S/>x ^xxx^yxx t^^<^ <£rt2-'/Z-i&&t' '- ^^*- — 119 — SDie Oliette, the source. 120 — 121 VOCABULARY. $ber, conj., but abfatlen (strong), v. n., to fall off Sibgabe, f., tax abgefyen (strong), y. n., to leave, v. n. abljdngen (strong), v. n., to depend abljauen (strong), v. a., to cut down abl)o(en, v. a., to call for abfefntett, v. a., to decline abrcifen, v. n., to depart 5Ibretje, f., departure ab|d)netben (strong), v. a., to cut off 9lbfd)teb nefymen, to take leave abfdjretbett (strong), v. a., to copy $bfxd)t, f., intention, design abtragen (strong), v. a. , to pull down abruefenb, adj., absent $d)je, f-, axis in Wdjt nefjmen, to take care of ad)t, num. eight; ber ad)te, the eighth ad)ten, v. a., to esteem 2(bt>0Cat, m., lawyer after, e, e§, adj., all ^limofen, n., alms 5Xt^>ert, plur. f. , the Alps aU r conj., than, as, when alt, adj., old amerit'amfd), adj., American, adj. amiifiren, v. a., to amuse; fid) ctnuift= ren, v. refl., to enjoy one's self att, prep., at ber cmbere, adj., the other anbem, v. a., to change, v. a. anerfennen (strong), v. a., to acknow- ledge anfangen (strong), v. a., to begin, commence 5lnforbermtg, f., demand anfiitlen, v. a., to fill, v. a. cmgeben (strong), v. a., to state ber 2lngef(agte, the accused 2(ngelegenf)eit, f., affair angenefym, adj., pleasant angretfen (strong), v. a., to attack 2lngriff, m., attack fief) anfletben, to dress (one's self) anftopfen, v.n , to knock (at the door) anfommen (strong), v. n., to arrive 5ln!unft, f., arrival 2Mage, f., talent 2lntmttf), f. , grace annefymen (strong), v. a., to accept, to take 5lnorbnung, f., regulation anreben, v. a., to address ctnjefyen (strong), v. a., to look at 2lnftd)t, f., view 2(nfprud), m., claim anftellen, v. a., to appoint fid) anftrengen, to exert one's self 5Inftrengung, f., effort •ftntrag, m., application cuitroorten, v. intr., to answer emmenben, v. a., to employ cur 5 eigen, v. a., to announce aitgiefyett (strong), v. a., to put on s i(pfe(, m., apple Arbeit, f., work, labor arbeiten, v. n., to work, to labor fid) tirgern, to be angry, displeased 2Irgrt)cd)n, m., suspicion arm, adj., poor fcnee, f., army i %vt, f., kind 122 — to rise. See page 68. tyr^t, m., physician at(anti)d), adj., Atlantic, adj. aud), particle, also auf, prep., on, upon aufbaneu, v. a., to build up 3litfgabe, f., lesson, exercise, task aufgeijen, axiffterjen, auff alien (strong), v. intr. with dat., to strike auf fatten (strong), v. a., to delay; fidj auffyatteu, to stay auffjebeu (strong), v. a., to pickup auffjoreit, v. n., to cease auf m a d)eu, v. a., to open Slufmerffamfeit, f-, attention auf rid) tig, adj., upright, sincere auffdjreibeu (strong), v. a., to write down Sluftrag, m., order auftnadjeu, v. n., to awake $uge, n., the eye OU^, prep. . out of, from auSbreiteu, v.n., to extend auSbreuueu, v. n., to burn out auSborreu, v. a., to parch aufterft, adj., extreme augfiiljreu, v. a., to execute, accom- plish, carry out auSriiften, v. a., to endow 3bl$fd)UJ3, m., board (of persons) au3jet)en (strong), v. n., to look, v. n. au§jet3eu, v. a , to expose 2tu$fid)t, fl, prospect auStauf d)eu, v. a., to exchange auS&erfaufen, v. a., to sell out. iBarjitrjof, m., railroads tation batb, adv., soon 33att, m. f ball ^Bctub, n., ribbon; m., volume 23auf, f., bank (moneyed institute) 23a je, f., cousin, f baueu, v. a., to build SBaum, m , tree beabftdjttgen, v. a., to intend ber 23eamte, m., the officer (civil) bebaueru, v. a., to regret bebecfen, v. a., to cover 23ebeutuug, f., meaning ber iBebteute, man-servant 23ebiugung, f., condition bebrofyeu, v. a. , to threaten befet)(eti (strong), v. a., to command 53eftnbeu, n., health fid) befiubeu (strong), to do, to be (of health) befolgeu, v. a., to follow (an order) befbrberu, v. a., to forward fid) begebeu, to betake one's self, to proceed fid) begegueu, to meet (one another) begefyren, v. a., to demand begtetteu, v. a., to accompany begrabeu (strong), v. a,, to bury befyaubelrt, v. a., to tieat berjcmpteu, v. a., to assert, to state befyerrjdjeu, v. a., to rule over bet, prep., with, in the house of SBeifall ftubeu, to meet with favor betUJOlnten, intr. v. w. dat., to be present at belannt, adj., known ber 23efatmte (personal noun), the acquaintance 33efauutfd)aft (abstr. n.), acquaintance belagern, v. a., to besiege 23e(ageruug, f., siege beldftigeu, v. a., to molest belaufdjeu, v. a., to watch belexbigeu, v. a., to insult bellen, v. n., to bark beloi)uett, v. a., to reward bemerfen, v. a., to perceive, to remark 23emerfung, f., remark beuaci)rid)tigeu, v. a., to inform beueiben, v. a., to envy 25evg, m., mountain berid)ten, v. a., to report berufymt, adj., renowned befd)dbtgett, v. a., to damage — 123 ftcf) befd) dfttgen, to occupy one's self befcfyteften (strong), v. a., to bombard 53efd)lnJ3, m.< conclusion befdjufbtgen, v. a., to accuse befe^en, v. a., to occupy (take pos- session of) befiegen, v. a., to defeat fid) beffent, to improve (one's self) beftdttgen, v. a., to confirm 23efted)img, f. , bribery befiefyen in (strong), to consist in etnen SBejud) madjen, to pay a visit befudjen, v. a., to visit fid) betragen (strong), to behave (one's self) SBetragen, n., conduct betrdd)tltd), adj., considerable betriiben, v. a., to afflict; e3 betrxibt mid), I am sorry fid) betriiben, to be grieved, sorry SBett, n., bed Settler, m. , beggar fid) SBeroegung madjen, to take exercise betxmnbern, v. a,, to admire SBter, n. , beer 23tfb, n,, (pi. filter), picture SBtrne, f., pear btS, prep, and conj., to, till, until bitten (strong), v. a., to request Sfott (pi. flatter), n., leaf blew, adj., blue 23(et, n , lead SB'fcifttft, m., pencil bletben (strong), v. n., to remain bftfren, v. n., to lighten ntd)t b(og, conj.. not only b(ii()en, v. n., to blossom, to flourish 23lume, f., flower *33oot, n., boat bofe, adj., wicked, naughty SBote, m , messenger §3otfd)Ctft, f., message brand) en , v. a., to need, v. a. brecfjen (strong), v. a. & n., to break brctt, adj., broad, wide brennen, v. a. & n., to burn 23rief, m., letter SBrteftajcfje, f , pocket-book bringen (strong), v. a., to bring *33rot, n., bread 23vnber, m., brother SBriiffet, n., Brussels 33ud) (pi. S8iid)cr) f n., book *23nd)l)alter, m., book-keeper 23ud)l)dnMer, m., book-seller fid) biicfen, to stoop 23iirgfd)aft, f., bail Gutter, f ., butter (£oncert, n., concert dongreg, m., Congress dongregmitglieb, m., member of Con- gress corrigtren, v. a., to correct douftn, m., (male) cousin; (Confine, f., (female), cousin D. S)a, adv., there; conj. since b airtalS, adv., then, at that time 2)ame, f., lady banfen, v. intr., to thank bajj, conj., that batiren, v. a. . to date bauern, v. n., to last bein, pronoun, thy; betner, ber betntge, thine benfen (strong), v. n., to think beutud), adj., distinct beutjd), adj. German (adj.) ber 3)eutfd)e, German (noun) 2>entjd)(anb, n., Germany btd)t, adj., dense bicttven, v. a., to dictate Wiener, m., man-servant btefer, e, e3, pron., this bonnern, v. n., to thunder 2>orf (pi 3)orfcr), n., village bort, adv., there, at that place bret, num., three; bretmal, three times ftd) brefyen, to revolve, to turn 124 — bet brttte, num., the third bimiel, adj., dark blird), prep., through, by bitrdjauS rttd)t, not at all bnrfteu (biirftert), v. n., to be thirsty SDu^enb, n., dozen C?l)e, eonj., before (conj.) cl)erna(3, adv., formerly (SI) re, f., honor (St (pi. Cncr), n., egg etgen> adj , own (Sigenfrfjaft, f., quality ©tgentfyumer, m., owner em, a, one fid) e tub t (ben, to imagine einige, adj. plur., a few *Cnnfommen, n., income etnlabcrt (strong), v. a., to invite - (gttliabung, f-, invitation Csmtafj, m. , admission etnmal, adv., once; nod) etmnal, once more (5umal)me, f., revenue ehmcljmeit (strong), v. a., to occupy, to carry (a fortress) etnfeljen (strong), v. a., to be aware of etttft, adv., once (upon a time) *(Sinmol)ner, m., inhabitant etn$teljen (strong), v. a., to collect CWtffl, ad J> single, only (adj.) ■ C?t3, n., ice ©if en, n., iron (5tjenbat)n, f., railroad (StJettbafytlgUCJ, m., railroad-train fid) efetit, to be disgusted <5tte,f., ell, yard ©(tent (plur.), parents Cnibe, n., end Cntgldnber, m., Englishman entbccfcn, v. a., to discover eutfaffeit (strong), v. a., to dismiss entmutbtgert, v. a., to discourage Cnitfdjdbtgung, f., damages entfd)nlbtgen, v, a. , to excuse (htt|d)iitbtgimg, f., excuse entroetd)en (strong), v. intr., to escape en^iidenb, adj., charming er, pers. pron., he (Srbttterung, f., animosity (Srbe, f., earth erfreuen, v. a., to delight *GrfoIg, m., success, result fid) ergeben (strong), to surrender (one's self) erfyalten (strong), v. a., to receive ert)eb(id), adj., considerable fid) ertnnern, to remember erf (drat, v. a. , to declare ftd) erf&tten, to take a cold erfrcmfen, v. n., to fall sick erfemten, v. a., to recognize fid) erftmbigen, to inquire erlanbett, v. a., to permit, to allow (Sxfaubittfs, f., permission ermutfjtgen, v. a. , to encourage erndbjren, v. a., to support ernteit, v. a. & n., to harvest erobertt, v. a., to conquer errctd)en, v. a., to obtain, to reach err id) ten, v. a., to establish, to erect erringen (strong), v. a., to obtain (with effort) ftd) erfd)rccfen (strong), to be fright- ened, scared erft, adv., not till erftaunen, v. a., to astonish (v. a.) ber erfte, num., the first erjudjen, v. a., to request erroarten, v. a., to expect (Srrtmrtimg, f., expectation erroetfen (strong), v. a. to prove er^telen, v. a. , to derive eg, pers. pron., it effeu (strong), v. a., to eat ettuct§, indef. pron., something, any- thing euer, poss. pron., your; ber eure, ber curige, yours (Suvopa, Europe. — 125 — gafyren (strong), v. n., to ride (on a vehicle) gall, m., case fallen (strong), v. n., to fall faft, particle, almost fauf, adj., idle, lazy geber, f., pen geberrneffer, n., pen-knife geinb, m. , enemy fctttblid), adj., hostile gelb (pi: gelber), n., field gelbfyerr, m -> commander gelb^ug, m., campaign genfter, n., window geuer, n., fire finben (strong), v. a., to find glajcrje, f., bottle gletj}, m., diligence gfetfd), n., meat, flesh fletgtg, adj.. diligent flieljert (strong), v. n., to flee gtiigef, m., wing g(uj3, m., river fortrdnmen, v. a,, to remove gortjd)ritt, m., progress fortfe^eu, v. a., to continue frogen, v. a., to ask (a question) gvanfretd), France gran$oje, m. , Frenchman fran^ofifrf), adj., French (adj.) gran, f., woman, wife grdutein, n., young lady, Miss gretfyeit, f. , liberty fid) freuen, to be glad, to rejoice greuub, m., friend (male); grcunbhtf., friend (female) greimbfcfyaft, f. friendship grteben, m., peace griebrid), Frederick fror), adj., glad gront, f., front groft, m., frost frieren (strong), v. n., to freeze grurfjt, f., fruit fvilrf}tbar, adj., fertile frill), adj., early grilling, m., spring fidj fiigen, to submit f iit)ven, v. a. , to conduct fur, prep., for fiivd)tert, v.n., to be afraid; v. a., to fear gitrft, m., prince guft, m.,foot ©. ©abet, f., fork @an§, f., goose gang, adj., whole gar nid)t, (particle,) not at all ©art en, m., garden @artentl)iir, I, garden-gate (Mrtlter, m., gardener (male); ($axU nertn, f., gardener (female) ©aft, m., guest @aftl)of, m., hotel geben (strong), v. a., to give ©eb&ube, n., building ©ebtrge, n. , mountain-chain ©ebrand), m., use gebraud)en, v. a., to use ©eburtstag, m., birth-day ©efafyr, f., danger *©efallen, m., the favor gef alien (strong), v. intr., to please geftiiltg, adj., obliging ber ©efangene, the prisoner gegen, prep., against ©egenb, f. , landscape, grounds ©egner, m., adversary gefyen (strong), v. n.,, to go, to walk, to step get)ord)en, v. intr. w. dat., to obey gel)oren, v. intr., to belong gebjortg, adj., proper @el)iilfe, m., assistant ©etft, m., mind @elb, n., money ©etbftiicf, n., piece of money @eiegenl)ett, f., occasion (Mer>vjamfeit, f., scholarship getcfyrt, adj., learned — 126 — gelteit (strong), v. n., to be esteemed, to be worth; etvoa% gelteit, to be for something ©emiife, n., vegetables *©eneral, in., general (noun) geuefen (strong), v. n., to recover . (neuter) geniigenb, adj., sufficient gevecl)t, adj., just gem, adv., gladly, willingly ber ©efanbte, the embassador ©efdjcift, n., business ©ejd)i(f , n. , ability gefdjuft, adj., able ©efettfdjaft, f., company ©ejefe, n., law gejunb, adj., healthy geftevn, adv., yesterday geftefyen (strong), va., to acknowledge ©etretbe, n., grain ©era alt, f- , force Cjeitrig, adj., certain ©emitter, n„ thunderstorm @ert)ot)nt)eit f f , habit geu)ol)rtlid), adj., ordinary, common ©tebei, m., top (of a roof) ©ipfet, m., top (of a mountain etc.) ®lq§, n., glass glauberi, v. a. & n., to believe ©laitbett, m., faith, belief ©Iciubiger, m., creditor ©1M, n., fortune, success, happiness gliicfltcf), adj./ happy @ofi>, n , gold golben, adj., golden, gold (adj.) ©rabert, m., moat, ditch ©raf, m., count grog, adj., great, large, big ©rurtb, m., reason gut, adj., good, kind ©lit, n., property ©iite, f., kindness ft §abert, v. a., to have em tjalbei* (e, eg), half a £al8binbe, f., cravat fatten (strong), v. a., to hold, to keep §cmb, f„ hand §anbel, m„ trade Ijanbeln, v. n., to act *§cmb|d)ul), m., glove fycingett (strong), v. n., to hang I) art, adj., hard fyaffen, v. a., to hate Jpauptftabt, f., capital §au3 (pi. £aufer), n., house §augtf)itr, f., street-door r^eilen, v. a. & n., to heal fyetratfyen, v. a., to marry fyetgen, v. a. & n., to warm the rooms, to build a fire §etb, m., hero fyelfetl (strong), v. intr.w. dat., to help §emb, n., shirt rjerauSforbern, v. a., to challenge §erbft, m., autumn berein font men, ) , i)inem!ommen, J to come in, get in beveiutvetert, ) , Ijinemtrcten, } toste P™ §err, m.. gentleman, Mr. fyeruberfdjroimmeii, | l)inuberftf)nrimmen, J ° ! fyeqtid), adj., sincere l)eute, adv., to-day l)ier,*adv., here §imtnel, m., heaven, sky §inberntg, n» obstacle l)od), adj., high I) off en, v. a. & n., to hope §offnung, f. , hope t)5flidj, adj., polite borert, v. a., to hear fjiibfdj, adj., pretty £uf)tt, n., chicken $iiife, f., help *£unb, m., dog fjungera, v. m, to be hungry §ut, m., hat • swim over 121 3. (vowel). 3Ijr, pers. pr., you, to her; poss. pr., her, their, your; ber trjrige, hers, theirs; ber 3f)rige, yours tinnier, adv.. always in, prep., in, into Snbltftrie, f., industry Staiten, Italy 3taliener (3taftatter),m.,Italian (noun) 3. (consonant). 3a, adv., yes *3afyr, n., the year jeber, e, eS, each, every Sebermann, everybody jema($, ever 3emanb, somebody, anybody jeber, c, e§ (dem. pron.), that (dein.), that one jet3t, adv., now jung, adj., young &affee, m., coffee $aijer, m., emperor Staib, n., (pi. Mlbtv), calf fait, adj., cold taltc, f, the cold £amerab, m., comrade ^anbibat, m., candidate ^anonabe, f., cannonade ^aitoneutugcl, f., cannon-ball $tije, m.. cheese £a£e, f., cat faufen, v. a., to buy, to purchase ittiufer, m., purchaser ^anfmann, m., merchant- letn, no, adj. pron. feiuien, (in ), v. a., to know $enntrttJ3, f. knowledge, attainment £inb, n., (pi. £tnber), child fefdje, f., cherry stager, m., plaintiff £(arfyett, f., clearness ^laffifer, m., classic (noun) £(eib (pi. ^teiber), n., dress tteilt, adj., small, little Shtabe, m., boy *^pffer, m., trunk £ot)le, f., coal £oirt, Cologne fommert (strong), v. n., to come ^ommobe, f., chest of drawers £onig, m., king tonight, f., queen fonnen, irr. v., to be able ^opfjd)mer,5, m., head-ache £orb, m., basket franf, adj., sick, ill &ranfrjeit, f., disease, sickness itreibe,. f., chalk itrieg, m.. war £rone, f , crown £ugei, f., bullet fliVj, adj., short, brief £aben, m., shop ganb (pi. £anber), n., country £anbgitt, n., farm, country-seat £anbt)au8, n., villa fang, adj., long lange (adv. of time), long, for a long time lanfen (strong), v. n., to run ee lantet, the bell rings [eben, v. n., to live £eben, n., life Sebensmtttet, n., victual, eatable leer, adj., empty £et)rer, m., teacher £erjrbucf), n., text-book £etcfie, f., corpse reicrjt, adj.. light, easy e3 tl)nt mir (etb, I am sorry letben (strong), v. n. & a., to suffer leifyen (strong), v. a. to lend £einu)anb, f, linen lernen, v. a., to learn iefen (strong), v. n. & a., to read lengnen, v. a., to deny £ente, pi., people, individuals — 128 lict), adj., dear; c§ ift mir ttet), lam glad lieben, v. a., to love iiegen (strong), v. n., to lie, to be (situated) Itttf, adj., left (side) 2tfte,f., list liter arijdj, adj., literary loben, v. a., to praise £od), n., (pi. £5d)er), hole 25ffcl f m., spoon £ot)n, in. & n., wages £ott), n., half an ounce 2oroe, m., lion Sllft fyaben, to have a mind (desire) m. Wladjtw, v. a., to make 9ftad)t, f., power 2)tabtf)en, n., girl Sftagb, f., maid-servant mdiiarti, Milan 9JtongeI,.m., want Wtann, m., (pi. Scanner), man (male), husband Sftarft, m., market Sftarmor, m. , marble ffiatftf), m., march 3Wauer,f., wall (outside) llietjr, indefl prom, more mefyrere, indef. pron., several mem, my; ber meimge, metner, mine 9J?enjd), m., man (human being) 2fteffer, n., knife *9Kctatt, n., metal Sfttnute, f., minute tniftftngen (strong), v. n., to fail mtt, prep., with tnitbrhtgett (strong), v. a., to bring along 3Wttglteb,n., (pi. er), member (person) imtnef)mett (strong), v. a., to take along 9D£ttteI,n., means, instrument mittfyetten, v. a., to communicate, to impart mogtid), adj., possible *3)tonat, m., month *2ftonb, m., moon ■*iD?orcjen, m., morning morgen, adv., to-morrow miibe, adj., tired fflliity, f., trouble Wlvitfy, im, courage Gutter, f., mother SL 9lad) t prep., after, to yiatfybax, rm, (male) neighbor; 9?ad)* bavin, f., (female) neighbor ttadjgebeit (strong), v. intr., to yield 9£ad)fid)t, f., indulgence ndd)ft, adj. & adv., next 9*ad)t, f., night 9?abel, f., needle, pin fid) no I) era, to approach 9?ame, m., name nag, adj., wet neben, prep., (near) by 9£ebe{ # m., fog Steffi, m., nephew nein f no (particle) nen, adj., new nid)t, not nidjt eintnat, not even mti)t§, nothing, not anything; ntd)t8 Wa$, nothing that me, mentals, never Dftebertage, f., defeat nod) (adv. of time), still, yet s D?ott) teiben, to suffer (be in distress) niirjltd), adj., useful ©♦ Cb, whether, if Cbft, n., fruit Cbvigfeit, f., the authorities ober, or off en, adj., open offent(id), adj., public off nen, v. a., to open Cfyettn, Dnfel, m., uncle 129 ot)tte, prep., without Crbnung. order (opposed to disorder) Oftieidj ,Cefterueicfi), Austria *. *$aar, n., pair, couple garret, f-, party tjtaffagfcr, m., passenger Sgfeffer, ni.. pepper $ferb, n., horse guanine, f., plum pftaftent, v. a., to pave prlegert. a-, a., to nurse *ohttiort, f., revolution (uprising) Sftjeut, m., Ehine Dftdjter, m.. judge vidlttg, adj.. correct 3£tng, m., ring jRocf, m.. c^at rotl), adj., red Diuhm, in., glory fid) riilimen (w. gen.), to boast (of) Sftuftfanb, Russia Sadie, f.. thing fdcil, v. a. & n.. to sow (scatter) iagert, v. a., to say, to tell *@al& n.. salt Sdjaben, m.. damage fd)aDen, v. intr., to injure idjarf, adj., sharp fdjeilieit (strong), v. n., to shine, to seem fd)icfen, v. a., to send *@d)icffal f n., fate ScfjieferDad), n., slate-roof §>d)iff, n.. ship Sd)t[Dmad)e, £., sentinel Scf)trtbel, f.. shingle Sd)tll!en, m., ham Zdjiadjt, f., battle Scf)tacr)tfe(b, n.. field of battle jd]lafen (strong), v. n., to sleep fdjlagen (strong), v. a., to beat, to strike |d)ied)t, bad 130 fdjliefjen (strong), v. a., to close ©djloft, n., (pi. ©djloffer), castle ©d)luffet, m., key ©djmrq, m., pain e$ ]d)Htergt mid), I am grieved, sorry ©d) nab el, m., beak ©d)nce, m., snow ©djuectoetter, n., snow-storm jdjneibcn (strong), v. a., to cut ©djnetber, m., tailor fdjneten, v. nv, to snow fdjott, adv., already fd)0!t, adj., beautiful, fine ©d)ottf)cit, f., beauty fd) red ltd), adj., terrible ld)retbcn (strcng) > v. n. & a., to write *©d)ut), m., shoe *©d)nl)mad)er, m., shoemaker ©djlllb, f-, debt, guilt ©djule, f., school ©djiiler, m., scholar (pupil) ©d)itt3, m., shelter, protection fd)U)ad), adj., weak jd)U)ar*, adj., black fdjiuer, adj., heavy, difficult ©d)tt)efter, f., sister fdjttnnbfig, adj., giddy ©d)ruinbfud)t, f., consumption fd)tt)i£en, v. n., to sweat, to perspire ©c(at>e, m., slave ©eerciuber, m., pirate fefyen (strong), v. a. & n., to see fefyr, adv.,' very, very much ©etfe, f., soap fetn, his, ber feintge, his (without a noun) fetn, v. n., to be fett, prep., before, since, ago; conj. since, ever since *©enat, m., senate fenben, (irr.) v. a., to send ©enf, m., mustard fid) fet5en, to take a seat ©id)erf)eit, f., safety ©teg, m., victory ©i(ber, n., silver fttbern, adj., silver, v adj.) ftt^en (strong), v. n., to sit ©i£mtg, f., session, meeting fo, adv., so, thus fogletd), adv., presently, directly, im- mediately ©ofyn, m., son foldjer, e, e$, such ©olbat, m., soldier ©ommer, m., summer jonberbar, adj., odd fonbern, but ©onne, f., sun ©onntag, m., sunday ©panten, Spain fparjant, adj., economical fptit, adj., late fpajteren fasten, to take a ride fpajteren geljen, to take a walk ©petfc, f., food, eatable, (n.) Spiegel, m., mirror, looking-glass fpielen, v. n., to play ^pxad)?, f., language 1pred)cn (strong), v. n., to speak ©tabt, f., city, town ftdbttjd), adj., city, (adj.) ©tal)l, m., steel ftarf, adj., strong ©tcivfe, f., strength ©tatton, f., station Statue, f., statue ©tanb, m., dust ©telle, f. , place fteHen, v. a. , to place ©tellung, f., position fterben (strong) v. n., to die ©ttcfef, m., boot ©tod:, m., cane, stick ftbrett, v. a. , to disturb ftraf en, v. a. , to punish ©trage, f., street frrenge, adj., severe ©trumpf, m., stocking ©tiicf, n., piece ftltbiretl, v. n., to study ©tul)t, ni., chair — 131 — 8tunbe, f., hour (gttjl, m., style fud)en, v. a., to seek, to look for (gumme, f., sum <8uppe, f., soup £abeltt, v. a., to blame, to censure *£ag, m., day; ad)t £age, a week tagltd), adj., daily e§ tagt, the day breaks Xantt, f., aunt £apferfett, f., valor, bravery £ajd)entud), n., pocket-handkerchief %a)]t, f., cup taufdjcn, v. a., to deceive, to disap- point Stefegrapt), m., telegraph teller, m., plate *£t)a(er, m.. dollar Sfyauroetrer, n.. thaw *£l)eater, n., theatre £f)ee, m., tea £r)eif, m., part tfyeuer, adj., dear %\)\tx t n., animal, brute trmn (strong & irr.), v. a., to do £f)iiv(e), f., door, gate £()Urm, m., tower, steeple ttef, adj., deep £iger, m., tiger Sinte, f., ink £tfd), m., table £ifd)(ev, m., joiner Stodjter, f., daughter Xoh f m., death tobt, adj.. dead tobtert, v. a., to.kill tbbtltd), adj.. fatal transportiren, v. a., to transport traurtg, sad; id) bin traurtg, I am sad, I am sorry, grieved treffett (strong), v. a., to hit fid) trennen, to separate (from one another) treu, adj., faithful trirtfen (strong), v. n. & a., to drink tr often, v. a., to comfort, to console £rnppen, pi. troops %u&, (pi. &ud)er), n„ cloth It. Ubel, adj., sick in the stomach liber, prep., over, above liberal!, adv., everywhere *uberjjaufett, v. a., overwhelm *uberrajd)ert, v. a,, to surprise *iiberienben, (irr.), v. a., to send *itbertragert (strong), v. a. , to confer (upon) iiber^eugt, adj., convinced Ur)f, f., watch, clock *U£)rmad)er, m.. watchmaker um, prep., around, about *umgebert (strong), v. a. , to surround umget)en (strong), v. n., to associate Umlauf,m. .revolution (turning round) *itmringen, to surround (in a circle) lining, m., sketch unattgenerjnt, adj., unpleasant unartig, adj., naughty imbebeutenb, adj., inconsiderable unbegriinbet, adj., unfounded itnb, conj., and Unfcfl, m., accident, misfortune UngUtcf, n., misfortune ungliidltd), adj ..unhappy, unfortunate Ultorbnuug, f.. disorder Unredit, n., wrong . intrid)ttg, adj., incorrect lmfer, our: ber unfrtge, ours unter, prep,, under, below, beneath untergefyen (strong), v. n., to set (of the sun etc.) *ftdj mtterbatten (strong), to converse Unterrjattimg, f.. conversation Uttternefymimg, f. , enterprise "UUterrtd)ten, v. a. , to instruct, to in- form Urtterrtd)t nefyrnen, to take lessons *unterftufeen, v. a., to support untreu, adj., faithless 132 — uttbovftdjttg, adj., incautious Uttroatjr, adj., untrue Umiuffeufyett, f., ignorance immo()(, adj., unwell un^lldffig, adj., inadmissible Ui'jadje, f., cause filter, m., father SBateulcmb, n., one's own country, fatherland fid) berbeugen, to bow (down) sBei'Dred)cn, n., crime 2}erbad)t, m., suspicion berbtenert, v. a., to deserve SSerbienft, n., merit berbricjjitd), vexed, irritated e3 oerDrtejjt mid), I am vexed, irritated berborrert, v. n;, to dry up berfotgen, v. a., to pursue bergeblid),adv„ in vain bergeffen (strong), v. a., to forget fid) berg(etd)ert (strong), to make a compromise bergniigt, adj., glad 2>ergniigen, n., pleasure Dergrofcevrt, v. a., to increase t)err)aftert, v. a„ to arrest berfaufen, v. a., to sell berfetmen, v. a., to misjudge bertcmgert, v. a., to demand SSerlcmgen, n., demand berfaffeit (strong), v. a., to leave, quit, desert berlcutmben, v. a., to slander berlejert (strong), v, a,, to read Dertefcen, v. a., to hurt berltereit (strong), v. a., to lose bermtetfyen, v. a., to rent ^ennbgen, n., property benruttt)en, v. a., to presume uerntefjten, v. a., to annihilate berpflid)ten, v. a,, to pledge berratfycn (strong), v. a., to betray ftd) bcrjanimctn, to assemble (v. n.) berfdumert, v. a., to miss ^erjdjansuncj, f., entenchment t>erfct)(iegen (strong), v. a., to lock berjd)bnent, v. a., to embellish t)erjd)uuiibert (strong), v. n., to dis- appear bevfefyert (strong), v. a., to provide berficfjern (v. a.), to assure berftnteit (strong), v. n.,to sink (v. n.) berforgen, v. a., to supply t>ciipred)etx (strong), v. a., to pro- mise SBeiipredjert, n., ) ^eripred)ung,f.J promise ^erftdrfung, f., reinforcement berftefjen (strong), v. a., to un- derstand *i8erfu{f), m., attempt bevfudjert, v. a., to attempt, to endeav- or, to try bertrjeibigen, v. a„ to defend bertretett (strong), v. a., to represent berurjadjert, v. a., to cause berurtfyetfen, v. a., to condemn $erurtf)ei(ung, f., condemnation bennaltert, v. a., to manage, to ad- minister SBerroalturtg, fr, administration berrbicfelrt, v. a., to implicate bertrjuuben, v. a., to wound ^Better, m., cousin (male) Std), n„ cattle biet, much; biete, many bieUeid)t, perhaps bier, four; btermal, four times; biertel, a quarter; bcr bierte, the fourth $ogei, m., bird i£otf, n., the people (nation) boll, adj., full boflenben, v. a., to finish bofttg, adv., fully bOU, prep., of, from, by bOV, prep., before, ago borberetten, v, a., to prepare borlaben (strong), v. a., to summon boriegett, v. a., to submit (place be- fore) — 13c SBorlefmtg, C, lecture ^ovratt), m., stock Ifcrfdjlag, m v proposition tiorjicf)tU], adj., cautious bcr 33orfi£ettbe, chairman Doriibergeljen (strong), v. n., to pass fcorjieljen (strong), v. a., to prefer 2$ad)fatrt, adj., watchful n)ad)jert (strong), v. n., to grow ilBagert, m., carriage (fid)) rrjagert, to venture SBafyf, f., election, choice rmifylert, v. a., to elect, to choose fEMttfitX, m., voter ItJd^nen, v. a. , to suppose (wrongly) tvafyv, adj., true tDarjrenb, prep., during; conj. while SBatyrtyett, f.. truth Salb (pi. 2BMbcr) r m., forest £8 a II, m., rampart SSaitb, f-, wall (inside) ttmnn, interrog. adv.. when ? ft) arm, adj., warm tt)tirmert, v. a., to warm roarten, v. a., to wait rrmrum, adv., why rca§, pron., what *2Saffcr, n., water 2Bed)fef, m. . note (bill of exchange) 23 eg, m., way, road rrjegert, prep., on account of fid) raeigern, to refuse (v. n.) ft) e it,' eon j., because SSetrt, m., wine SBemgarten, m., vine-yard tueig, adj., white ftoeife, adj., wise 28ei§fyeit, f., wisdom rcett, adj., far fttefdjer, which, who, that ft)ertig, little, few; rrjeniger,less (fewer) ft)er, interr. pron. , who ? SSetter, n., weather tuie, interr. adv., how ? berftne tuelfle, what day of the month, what (in order) ? *mtberfal)reit (strong), v. intr., to befall *ftcf) nuberfe^en, to resist, to oppose rtneber, adv., again hneberfetyen (strong), v. a., to see again rrjtjTert, irr. v. a., to know ft)0, where 2Bod)e, f. , week TVOfyf adv., well rnot)[feiL adj., cheap ftjofjnen, v. n., to dwell, to live, reside 25oljtum(J, f., residence *2Bort (pi. cither SBorte or Sorter), n., word SBlltlbarjt, m., surgeon 2£urtbc, f., wound ltd) rtutrtbent, to wonder 2Bimfd), m., wish, desire nmuidjen, v. a., to wish, to desire £9urm, m. (pi. SSiirmer), worm £>a\){, f., number latyitn, v. a. & n., to pay jaljten, v. a., to number 3a!)lt f m., tooth geidjttett, v. a. & n., to draw (make a draft) 3ett, f., time getturtg, f., newspaper jerftorett, v. a., to destroy 3immer, n., room 3tmmcrmann, m., carpenter 3oII, m., inch ber 3 ^^ eam ^ e , tne custom-house- officer JU, prep., to; adv. too 3ucfer, m., sugar gufdtltg, adj.. accidental 134 gufrtebett, adj., contented, satisfied, pleased 3ufu!)i\ f., supply, provisions gugebett (strong), v. a., to concede jjufyovett, v. a., to listen to 3iurtad)ert, v. a., to shut j|Urit<£ adv., back guriicfferjren, v. n., to return Suriicf faffeit (strong), to leave behind guriicfreijen, v. n~, to go (travel), back ^uvucffcrjicfen, v. a., to send back fid) juviicfjieEjen (strong), to with- draw, to retreat jufammen, adv., together JUftcttcn, v. a., to deliver 3ufttmmung, f., approbation, consent 3rr»ecf, m.. purpose $rrjet, two; ber jrrjeite, the second jroetfefljaft, adj., doubtful ^meifeln, v. n., to doubt $rrjetma(, twice & fitter; Hefo fouk. Easy and Successful Introduction of tlie German Language INTO PUBLIC SCHOOLS. In the fall of 1870, the German Language became a general branch of instruction in the Male Department of Grammar School No. 15. New York City, in accordance with the amended By-Laws of the Board of Education. Of the 500 boys in the School nearly one half, belonging to American, Irish, Scotch or English families, until six months ago knew nothing whatever of the German language. On Friday, March 31st 1871, an examination was held to test the progress made in the new study. It was demonstrated, on this occasion, in a most satisfactory manner, that though the German boys of course excelled the others in conversational powers, the American, Irish and English boys had learned the action and grammatical construction of the German language surprisingly well, fully equalling the children of German parentg. The several grades were examined in succession; the pupils not only read and translated German into English, and English into German, but they also wrote down in correct German script English phrases given them to be rendered into German. At the close of the exercises, Mr. Superintendent Kiddle, who had conducted the examination, congratulating the boys upon their remarkable success in engrafting the German lan- guage on the regular course of study, observed: Very many persons have thought that this could not be done, without sacrificing those English studies which in a practical point of view, are of paramount importance; but you have made the experiment, and under the able and zealous instruction of your excellent teacher, Mr, Hutten, you have achieved that which has given us not only pleasure and satisfaction, but sur- prise; for, in six months, to have acquired a facility in German pronunciation, to have learned to translate so large a number of German exercises into English, and vice versa, and to use with so much fluency the German script, is a task of no ordinary magnitude. Indeed, many persons on witnessing this ex- amination, might suppose that, during this period, you have done nothing but study German; but I can bear testimony, from the records of my de- partment, that the examinations to which this school has been subjected in the ordinary English branches, during the same period, were never more suc- •cssful or satisfactory. 6. §ttmtj #xfo |)ork. I am especially gratified with this result, because it confirms, in some degree at least, the theory which I have always held in regard to the study of German in our schools; namely, that far from retarding, or in any way inter- fering with the other brunches of study, it would tend to facilitate them. My friend Commissioner Grquss in the remarks which he has just made, has most fully and clearly explained the affinities which exist between our own language and the Germ. m, and thus has demonstrated the great desirability of study- ing them together, / am sure that the time thus .yent in the lower grades, will be sard to thtpupih when they come to study, in those more advanced, the theory of the English language. English grammar will then prove to them a very easy study indeed; while, at the present time, it is one of the most difficult tasks which they have ito perform, to understand those rules and principles which seem to have so little practical value because our language is comparatively so free from those variations and modifications which render such rules necessary. Besides, the more exact knowledge, thus acquired, of the mean- ing of words will give the pupils a more ready command of their own language, and thus contribute to their speedy advancement in all those branches of study which require accurate and fluent expression. It is upon these general grounds — upon the plea of general appropriate- ness and utility that I have advocated the introduction of the study of German into our schools, not as a special, but as a general branch. It is not because our German fellow citizens, although constituting so large a portion of our population, ask for it as being useful or desirable to them, but because -I recognize in this branch of study a most effective educational agent, as well for in- tellectual training, as for impai ting information, and affording an accom- plishment, of value to all, to whatever class or nationality they may belong, I trust, therefore, that the example set by this school, under the efficient management of its able and experienced principal, may be followed by other schools; and that other Boards of Trustees throughout the city may follow the lead of the intelligent and enterprising school officers of the 11th Ward, under whose upright and zealous administration the schools of the Ward have attained so high a standard of excellence. And I must also say, my young friends, that you will be encouraged by your success this morning to persevere in the work which you have so well begun. To the study of language, the saying of one of the ancient philo- sophers, ■ — - "The roots are bitter, but the fruit is sweet," is particularly ap- plicable; for the rudiments of every language must be studied as a task. These rudiments you are fast acquiring and you will soon experience the pleasures and advantages to be derived from the ability to use with readiness, both in reading and speaking, so grand a vehicle of thought as the language which you have commenced to study.. As above stated, it surpassed the expectations of every- body present to find the entire class of the loicest grade so firmly instructed not only in pronunciation and translation but even in the correct and fluent use of German script, — and all this after barely 24 weeks' tuition of not more than one hour and a half per iceek ! The only Text-Book put into the hands of the youngest pupils, was Ahn's Rudiments of the German Language (published by E. Steiger, New York). $. Bimtx, Xicb y orl THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. (The following books are in paper covers, unless otherwise stated ; but they can be promptly bound in any style, at moderate prices ; those marked * are printed and published by myself, the others are imported. E. Steiger.) *F. AHN. German Primer. Edited by W. GrBACTERT. (Printed in large type, and with much uerman Script.) Boards $0.35. * Rudiments of the German Lan- guage. Exercises in Pronouncing, Spel- frng and Translating. (Witiimuch (ier- man Scrip;.) Boards $0.3.5. * Method of flu* German Language. ByGusTAvus Pisghek. (With itermaii Script.) First Course, Boards $0.50; Second Course, Boards $0.50; Both to- gether, Half Roan, 31.00. * New Practical and Easy Method of Learning the German Language. With Pronunciation by J. C. Oehl- SCHlaegek. (With many Reading Ex- ercises in German Script.) First Course (Practical Part), Boards $0.60; Second Course (Theoretical Part) , Boards $0.40: Both together,*. Boards $1.00, Half Roan $1.25. * German Handwriting. A Com- panion to every German Grammar and Reader. (All in German Script.) Boards $0.40. * Manual of German Conversation. Edited by W. Grauert. Cloth $1.00. The above books have, upon examination of the various text-books, been found to be the best adapted for teaching the German language in PUBLIC SCHOOLS, and are being used everywhere with remark- able success. The chief features for which they gain the preference over others, are : — i. Their simple and practical method, by which the time of both teacher and learner is employed to the best advantage. 2. The fidelity and care with which this method has been carried out in such a way as to elicit the pupil's interest and stimulate his desire of learning. 3. Their peculiar adaptability for use in Common Schools, where their value is invari- ably proved by the rapid progress of the pupils. 4. The frequent introduction of German Script, of the most approved modern style, in nearly ah of these books. 5. Their smailness obviously invites the pu- pil's speedy progress to the end of his labors, which he sees cl'ose at hand. 6. Their very moderate prices. FR. BAUER. Grundzilge der neuhoch- deutschen Grammatik fur hohere Bil- dungsanstalten. Paper $0.60. K. F. BECKER.. Ausfuhrliche deutsche Grammatik als Commentar der Schul- grammatik. 2 vols. Paper $5.00; Half Morocco $6.50. Handbuch der deutschen Sprache. (9. Auflage der deutschen Schulgram- matik.) Xeu bearbeitet von Th. Beckek. Paper $1.95; Half Roan $2.35. A Grammar of the German Lan- guage. Carefully revised and adapted for the use of English Students, by J. W. FRAEDERSDORF. Cloth $2.50 Leitfadenfur den ersten TJrderricht in der deutschen Sprache. Herausgegeben von Th. Becker. Paper $0.45; Half Roan $0.75. Per deutsche Stil. Paper $1.25. Lehrbuch des deutschen Stils. Her- ausgegeben von Th. Becker. Paper $1 00. ROD. BEXED1X. DermundlicheYortrag. Ein Lehrbuch fur Schulen und zuin Selbstunterricht. In drei Abtheilungen : Die reine und deutliche Aussprache des Hochdeutschen. Die richtige Betonnng und die Rhythmik der deutschen Spra- che. Die Schonheit des Vortrags. Paper $2.50. L. CHOLEVIUS. Dispositional und Ma- teriaiien zu deutschen Aufsdtzen tiber Themata fur die beiden ersten Classen hoherer Lehranstalten. 2 vols. Paper. Vol. I. $1.55. Vol. II. $1.80. Praktische Anleituug zur Abfassung deutscher Aufsdtze, in Briefen an einen jungen Freund. Paper $1.00. J. A. EBERHARD. Synonymisches Hand.- vorterbuch der deutschen Sprache 'ftLr Alle, welche sich in dieser Sprache richtig ausdriicken wollen. Mit Be- zeichnung der Worter in englisclier, fran- zosischer, italienischer und r assise her Sprache. Paper $5.00; Half Morocco $6.2-5. C. F. FALKMAXX. Stilistik oder voll- st'andiges Lehrbuch der deutschen Yor- tragskunst. Paper $1.90. Stilistisches Elementarbuch oder: Erster Cursus der Stiliibungen enthal- terid: eine kurze Anleitung zum guten Stil, Aufgaben etc. fur Anfanger im schriftlicheu Vortrage und zur Selbst- belehrung. Paper $0.85. <£. Steigtr, $cfo |fork. *W. FECHNER. Systemaiische Schul- Vorschriften. ( Copy-Books with Models of German Script.) 5 Numbers. $ Dozen $1.80. *E. PELDNER. Kleine deutsche Sprach- lehre als Haadbuch fur Schiiler deutsch- amerikanischer Schulen. Boards $0.30. R. GOTTSCHALL. Poetik. Die Dicht- knnst und ihre Techuik. Vom Stand- punkte der Neuzeit. 2 vols. Paper $3.15. M. W. GOETZINGER. Deutsche Sprach- lehre fair Schulen. Durchgesehen und iiberarbeitet von E. Goetzinger. Paper $0.85; Hall Roan $1.L5. Stylschule zu Uebungen in der Mut- tersprache. Eine Sammlung stufen- m'assig geordneter Aufgaben und Ar- beitsentwiirl'e Mr hohere Anstalten. 2 vols. Paper $2.10. Deutsche Die 1 iter, erlautert fur Freunde der Dichtkunst uberhaupt und fur Lehrer der deutschen Spraehe ins- besondere. 2 vols. Paper $7.50. Dichtei^saal. Auserlesene Gedichte zum Lesen, Erklaren und Vortragen in hoheren Schulanstalten. Nach den Dichtern geordnet und herausgegeben von E. Goetzinger. Paper $1.70; Cloth $2 30. *W. GRAUERT. Manual of the German Language. First Part, Boards $0.40; Second Part, Bds. $0.40; Both together, Boards $0.70; Half Roan $0.90. * First German Reader. (With Notes and much iierman Script. *• Bds. $0.50. * Seco?id German Reader. (With Notes and much German Script ) Brds. $0.60. These two elementary Readers are intended to serve as companions to any German gram- mar, preparatory to classic German Readers. The reading - matter consists of interesting pieces, both descriptive and narrative, and of poems, in strictly systematical order ; a copious Vocabulary and Explanatory Notes are added to assist the student. *(W. Gkauekt and) A. DOUAI. Bilder- jlbel und Erstes Deutsches Lesebuch. (Printed in large type, with German Scnpc) Boards $0.30. * W. GRAUERT. Zwelles Deutsches Lese- buck. Boards $0.65. * Drittes Deutsches Lesebuch. Boards $0.75. * Vicrtes Deut selves Lesebuch. In press. These four German Readers form parts of the Turner-Schulbitcher, a Series prepared ex- pressly tor u.->- m liberal institutions. J. GRIMM. Deutsche Grammatik. 2. Ausgabe in 2 Bftnden. Vol. I, parts 1. 2. (As far as out.) Paper $7.50. J. und W. GRIMM. Deutsches Worter- buch. Fortgesetzt von R. Hildebrandt, K. Weigand und M. Heyne. 4to. Vol. I. Paper $6.70. " II. < 4 $6.20. " III. "' $6.70. " IV.a Parts 1 to 3, Paper $2.50. " IV.b " lto4, " $3.35. " V. " 1 to 9, " $7.50. ( As far as out. ) * J. HARDTER. Erstes Lesebuch, oder : Illustrirtes Lesebtichlein fur Anfanger. Ein sicherer Weg, Kinder in wenig Wo- chen deutsch lesen und schreiben zu lehren. (Printed in large type, with German Script) Boards $0.18. * Zweites Lese- und Lehrbuch fur ge- hobene Elementar - Klassen. Boards $0.30. These two German Readers are intended for schools under clerical superintendence. J. CHR. A. HEYSE. Theoretisch-prak- tische deutsche Grammatik, oder Lehr- buch zum reinen und richtigen Spre- chen,Lesen und Schreiben der deutschen Spraehe, nebst einer kurzen Geschichte und Verslehre derselben. Zun'achst zum Gebrauch fur Lehrer und zum Selbstun- terricht. 2 Bande. 5. Auflage. Auch unter dem Titel: Ausfuhrliches J^ehr- buch der deutschen Spraehe. Neu be- arbeitet von K. W. L. Heyse. 2 vols. Paper $8.35. Deutsche Schulgrammatik oder kurz- gefasstes Lehrbuch der deutschen Spraehe mit Beispielen und Uebungs- aufgaben. In der Bearbeitung von K. W. L. Heyse. Paper $1.25; Half Roan $1.70. Leitfaden zum grtindlichen Unter- richt in der deutschen Spraehe fur hohere und niedere Schulen nach den grosseren Lehrbuchern der deutschen Spraehe. Paper $0.45; Half Roan $0.75. Handwbrterbuch der deutschen Spraehe mit Hinsicht auf Rechtschrei- bung, Abstammung und Bildung, Bie- gung und Ftigung der Worter, sowie auf deren Sinnverwandtschaft. Nach den Grundsatzen seiner Sprachlehre ange- legt; ausgefuhrt von K. W. L. Heyse. 2 vols. Paper $7.50. P. F. L. HOFFMANN. Neuestes Worter- buch der deutschen Spraehe nach dem Standpunkte ihrer heutigen Ausbfldung. Boards $1.70. Cloth $2.00. £L\ Steiqer, ifefo Bark. P. F. L. HOFFMANN. PrdkUsches gram- matikatisches Worterbuch der deutsclien Sprache. Ein RathgeberfiirDiejenigen, weiche ohne Kenntuiss der grammati- schen Regeln richtig sprechen u. schrei- ben wollen. Cloth $1.20. Volksthumliches Worterbuch der deutschen Synonumenm alphabetischer Ordnimg. Yollstandige Erklarung der in der deutschen Sprache vorkoinmen- den sinnverwandten Worteretc. Boards $0.65. W. HOFFMAXX. VoUstdndiges Worter- buch der deutschen SpracJie, wie sie in der allgemeinen Literatur, der Poesie, den Wissenschaften etc. gebrauchlich ist, rait Angabe der Abstammung. der Rechtschreibung, der Wortformen etc., nebst einer kurzen Sprachlehre etc. 6 vols. Paper $10.00. Half Morocco $16.00. J. H. KALTSCHMIDT. Yollstdndiqes stamm- wad sinncerwandtschajtlicries Gesamnit worterbuch der deutschen Sprache aus alien ihren Mundarten und mit alien Fremdwortern. Ein Haus- schatz der Muttersprache fur alle St'ande des deutschen Yolkes. 4to. Half Mo- rocco $5.0). J. KEHREIN. Schulgrammatik der deut- schen Sprache. Mit besonderer Beriick- sichtigung der Classiker des 18. und 19. Jahrhunderts. Paper $1.05. — Deutsches Lesebuch fur Gymnasien, Seminarien und Realschulen mit sach- lichen und sprachlichen Erklarungen nebst Andeutungen zu einem prakti- schen Unterricht in der deutschen Spra- che. Untere Lehrstufe. Paper $1.05. Obere Lehrstufe. Paper $1.25. L. KELLNER. Praktischer Lehr gang fur den deutschen Sprachunterricht . Ein Hand- und Hilfsbuch fur Lehrer an Volks- und Btirgerschulen. 3 vols. . Paper $2.20. E. KLEINPAUL. Poetik. Die Lehre von den Formen und Gattungen der deutschen Dichtkunst. Pap. $1.25; Cloth $1.75. C. KRAUSE. Deutsche Grammatik fur Aus- und inlander als Leitfaden fur den Unterricht in der deutschen Sprach- lehre. mit besonderer Riicksicht auf aus- landische Institute im Inlande und deut- sche Institute im Auslande. Paper $1.00. O. LANGE. Sprachschatz der deutschen Literatur. Fur Schule und Haus bear- beitet. Yon den Anfangen der Litera- tur bis zur Xeuzeit (400 — 1867). Paper $3.35 ; Cloth $3.85. 3 K. MAGER. Deidsches KtemeftfarwerlL Lese- und Lehrbuch fur Gymnasien und hohere Biirgerschulen, Institute und Privatunterricht. 2 parts. Paper $3.00 ; Half Morocco $4.50. Part I. Deutsches Lesebuch. Paper $1.50: Half Morocco $2.25 Part II. Deutsches SpracJibuch. An- fange der Laut-, Wort-. Satz-, Stil- und Literaturlehre. Fiir untere, mittlere und obere Klassen. Paper $1.50: Half Morocco $2.25. H. MASIUS. Deutsches Lesebuch fiir hohere Unterrichts-Anstalten. Part I. Fiir untere Klassen. Paper $1.05. Part II. Fiir mittlere Klassen. Paper 11.25. Part III. Fiir obere Klassen. Paper $1.70. J. MIXCKWITZ. Lehrbuch der deutschen Verskunsi oder Prosodie und Metrik. Fiir L T niversit'aten. Gymnasien, Real- schulen, Seminarien, wie auch zum Selbstunterricht nach neuen Grund- s'atzen bearbeitet. Paper $0.90. H. OESTERLEY. Die Diohtkunst und ihre Gattungen. Ihrem Wesen nach darge- stellt und durch erne nach den Dich- tungsarten geordnete Mustersammlung eriautert. Mit einem Yorworte von K. Goedeke. Paper $1.25. *H. REFFELT. Lesefibeh oder: Erster Unterricht im Lesen, verbunden mit Denk- und Sprachubungen. (Printed in large type.) Boards $0.20. * ■ Das erste Lese- und Lehrbuch fiir deutsche Schulen, oder: Erste Uebun- gen im Lesen, Schreiben und Zeichnen, verbunden mit Denk- und Sprachiibun- gen. (Printed in large type, with, muck German Script.) Boards SO. 30. * Ziceites Lese- und Lehrbuch fur deutsche Schulen in den Yer. Staaten von Amerika. (With mu;h German Serpt) Boards $o.50. * Drilies Lese- und Lehrbuch. Boards $0.70. * Vieiies Lese- und Lehi^buch. Boards $0.70. * ■ Fiinftes Lese- und Lehrbuctu Boards $0*.65. * Erstes Buchfiir Schule und. Haus. (Printed in large type, with much Ger- man Script.) Boards $0.25. * Zweites Buch fur Schule und Haus. (Printed in large type, with much Ger- man Script.) Boards $045. Reffelt's Series of Text-P>ooks, being the resale of his experience as a practical teacher for more than thirty years, have deservedly obtained the widest circulation in Ameriea. C. SteUicr, Ytffo iTorh. •H. REFFELT. Allgemeine deutsche Vor- schriften fur den Unterricht ini Schon- schreiben. Methodiseh geordnet. (Mo- dels of German Script.) Number 1, 72 lines $0.25. Number 2, 72 lines $0.25. E. L. RITSERT und F. WAGXER. Die Lehre vom deutschen Stil, oder prakti- sche Anleitung zum riclitigen deutschen Gedankenausdrucke filrdie oberen Clas- sen der Volksschulen, hohere M'adchen- schulen etc. Paper SI. 00. E. L. ROCHHOLZ. Der deutsche Auf- satz. Xeun Abtheilungen stylistischer Aufgaben und Ausarbeitungen fur Leli rer und Schuler hoherer Schulen ent- worfen. Paper $2 50. H. B. RUMPELT. Deutsche Grammatik mitRtieksicht auf vergleichende Sprach- forschung. Vol. I. Lautlehre. Paper $1.25. D. SAXDERS. Wcrterbuch der deutschen Sprache. Mit Belegen von Luther bis auf d. Gegenwart. 4to. 2 vols in 3 parts. Paper $30.00; 3 vols. Half Morocco $36.00. Handworterbuch der deutschen Spra- che. Paper $3.15; Half Morocco $3.75. ♦SCHLEGEL and GRALERT'S Course of the German Language. Part First. A German Grammar for Beginners. Bv Chas. A. Schlegel. Half Roan $1.25. Part Second. A German Grammar for Advanced, Pupils. By W. Grauebt. In press. ♦SCHLEGEL'S Series of Classical German Readers. With Xotes. 3 parts, hi press m Schlegel's Course is based upon the genetic Method of the distinguished philologist KARL MAGER, which is superseding' all artificial plans of tuition wherever it becomes known. A. SCHLEICHER. Die deutsche Sprache. Paper $2.50. G. SCHWAB. Die deutsche Prosa von Mosheim bis auf unsere Tage. Eine Mustersammlung. 2. Auflage, besorgt vonH. Kluepfel. 3 parts. Paper $2.30. Fiinf Bilcher deutscher Lieder und Gediclde von A. v. Haller bis auf die neueste Zeit. Eine Mustersammlung mit Rlicksicht auf den Gebrauch in Schulen. Half Cloth $1.90. TH. VERXALEKEX. Deutsche Synia. 2 vols. Paper $6.70. Deutsche Schulgrammatik. Mit Be- riicksichfigung des Mittelhochdeutschen und mit Einschluss der deutschen Yers- lehre. Paper $1.15. PH. WACKERXAGEL. Deutsches Lese- bitch. Xach den Altersstufen. 3 parts each, in paper, $0.G5. 3 parts in 1 vol. Half Morocco $2.60. Part IV. Fur Lehrer. Auch un- ter dem Titel: Der VhterricJU in der Muttersprache. Paper $0.30. W. WACKERXAGEL. Deutsches Lese- buch. Xeue durch ein Handbuch der Li 'eraturgeschichte vermehrte Ausgabe. 3 vols, or parts 1 to 28. Paper $12.15. G. WEBER. Lesebuch zur Geschichte der deutschen Literatur alter und neuer Zeit. Paper $1.25. F. L. C. WEIGAXD. Deutsches Wbrter- buch. 3. vollig umgearbeitete Auflage von F. Schmitthexner's kurzem deut- schen Worterbuche. 2 vols. Pap. $10. 00; Half Morocco $12.50. Wcrterbuch der deutschen Synony- 7nen. 2. Ausg. Vol. I. II. Paper $5.00, CHR. WEXIG. Handworterbuch der deut- schen Sprache mit Bezeichnung der Aus- sprache und Betonung nebst Angabe der nachsten einnverwandten und der gebrauchlichsten Fremdworter und Ei- gennamen. Xeu bearbeitet von L. Kell- ner. Pap. $3.15; Half Morocco $4.00. R. WESTPHAL. PhUosophisch - histori- sche Grammatik der deutschen Spra- che. Paper $2.50. Theorie der neuhochdeutschen Me- trik. Paper $1.70. E. und F. WETZEL. Die deutsohe Spra- che. Eine nach methodischen Grund- s'atzen bearbeitete Grammatik fur ho- here Lehranstalten und zum Selbstun- terricht. 2 vols. Paper $1.05. *R. J.WURST. Kleine praktische Spraeh- denklehre, fur deutsch- amerikanische Schulen bearbeitet von J. Straubex- mceller. Boards $0.50. On hand many similar publications of great interest and value to students of the German language, — especially also German-English Dictionaries, large and small, works on the History of German Literature, Anthologies, etc., all of which have been excluded from the foregoing List for want of space. Separate lists may be had on application. »3 >:>; X ;> T - > > >> -> - ■*. *!'*£** h 9 ) J>) ^ 3 5& » > » >^ ? ~~_M& : % ) , X> £E ^ 35 =£ ^?* )j ) j}£& »^ : j* > , ~Wfr ; >)') 13E* -« ^ ^> ■> > ^)j& ;> l» > ;o X) * 33£ 5 > .) > ) L.^P' • j3 ) » > ••) y 1 : ■ **^P^ O) '")■" 9 3R) >:> ! -... -^ i3^ ' j>). ) > :>- >> ■--■X3§^- Ji> } ^pft >"'-' > > . . J3& - X' 1 ) 3» > > > -~— -3^ ' ^ ^ >- >> ■■y&?& - '"i?jT > ' J JH >X >£> < 3 •• _) ^ JRI »>; J^ ')> r ^«P^ -^ ^ ~ "^ffc »>' T> &< Bfck, ' : "53 } ~I 3Bt >.» y> ) j Hfc. . 1 X) > §>^ » ^?^- ' V3 > 22^ ~> 3B# 20 ") """"J ► > ■ Tn W> '>nn> j ►1 8K?->i> :> : t| f > fcX&jfo Zjl 1 >.:,' )3 • ) - ?•**-?■, -^ 3 ]3* V - ) Jr -> % 3 > 3 5: -^ ^ ^ v Jj>> y$ "> "^ 1 >x >3 1> 69 > > ■' 3 0~^& > 3 >"X1 > £ > ' i">^ ^ i ► :x ^ ) > ^r*e ?8 ^ "> ! *9 * ^> » <^5>^> > ^ > ^ > > > P^£S>> J> - > 3 > > -> >> y\y > » ) > > ^> > 33x33> ~^ > > >3 X _> > j i> X ^> - mi m ■ilS >3 ^: •^ >X "^ : ■gT >" >" ^ ^ , II > > ^ *M *i; ^ > y> ? ? ^ ^>' > j > ■■£■3 - ^»yy * > 3 I > 3 >■ ~ iHs^ "-^^ -398* ^> >-> > >> *■' > ;> V: " O >> 7 > >2> -> >> ■ > JJ> > ) -> y > > 03 > > > > * O ^ y? ^ ^ » » } :> ^ - » 3 > > » 3 > 5 » 3 >3 J :» > $ * > J, >> > o 33 >3> j>?3 > J) >